Mechanical Specs.

Trojena Operational Assets at Logistic Laydown Area
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

099611 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
099726 CEMENTITIOUS COATIN
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101423 PANEL SIGNAGE

102113.14 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.17 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
105113 METAL LOCKERS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
111313 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

111316 LOADING DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS
114000 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
118123 FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT
118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
120000 FURNITURE
122200 CURTAINS AND DRAPES
122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
123661.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
133423.16 FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

145200 MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING

210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210800 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
211119 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213116 DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213413 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

DOCUMENT CODE: 11-00013877-4800000930-DAH-DES-SPC-000001 REVISION: A Page 6 of 616
©NEOM [2022]. All rights reserved.
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523.11 GLOBE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523.12 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523.14 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523.15 GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
220800 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
221223.11 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319.13 SANITARY DRAINS
221323 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221429 SUMP PUMPS
223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
223200 DOMESTIC WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
224213.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
224213.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS
224216.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
224216.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923.11 CONTROL VALVES
230923.12 CONTROL DAMPERS
230923.13 ENERGY METERS
230923.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS

230923.16 GAS INSTRUMENTS

230923.17 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
230923.18 LEAK DETECTION INSTRUMENTS
230923.19 MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS
230923.21 MOTION INSTRUMENTS
230923.22 POSITION INSTRUMENTS
230923.23 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
230923.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
231113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
231213 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PUMPS
231313 FACILITY UNDERGROUND FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANKS
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233346 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233433.13 COMMERCIAL AIR CURTAINS
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713.13 AIR DIFFUSERS
233713.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
234100 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
236200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
237313.16 INDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237343.16 OUTDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
238123.11 SMALL CAPACITY (6 TONS (21 KW) AND SMALLER), COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-
CONDITIONERS, FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
238123.12 LARGE CAPACITY (7 TONS (25 KW) AND LARGER), COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-
CONDITIONERS, FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238129 VARIABLE REFRIGERAN-FLOW HVAC SSYSTEMS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262743 ELECTRIC VEHICLE SUPPLY EQUIPMENT AND CHARGERS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263213 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all NEOM’s guidelines and
procedures, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Section 210500 “Common Work Results or Fire Fighting” for applicable NEOM
provisions.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried and wheeled fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for
fire extinguishers.
B. Employer-Furnished Material: Hand-carried and Wheeled fire extinguishers.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the applicable requirements and recommendations of local Saudi Building Code
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations, for materials, installation, and identification for
fire extinguishers, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the
standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single man-
ufacturer.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Materials and Workmanship: Five years.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Complying with NFPA 10 and approved, listed, and labeled by UL and FM
Global.
1.6 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial
steel (CS) Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of
use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209).

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type SS304 / SS316.
D. Copper-Alloy Sheet, Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 per-
cent copper).
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416

E. Copper-Alloy Sheet, Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 per-
cent copper).
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. Portable Hand-Carried Fire Extinguishers:
1. Multipurpose dry-chemical type; UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 4.5 kg.

2. Purple-K dry-chemical type; UL-rated 80B:C, 4.5 kg.
3. Carbon dioxide type; UL-rated 10-B:C, 4.5 kg.
B. Mounting brackets: Manufacturer’s standard plated or baked-enamel steel.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS
1.1 PRODUCTS
A. Knocked-Down Corridor Lockers:
1. Doors: 1.52-mm steel-sheet panels, vented.

2. Hinges: Knuckle.
3. Door Handle and Latch: Recessed, multipoint latching.
4. Locks: Cylinder locks.
5. Base: Legs with closed front and ends.
6. Tops: Flat (not sloping).
7. Ends: Finished end panels.
8. Single-tier, shared lockers with center dividers.
9. Material: Steel sheet, metallic coated.
B. Locker Benches:
1. Tops: Laminated hardwood.

2. Pedestals: Fixed, tubular steel.
C. Knocked-Down Construction: Pre-assembled.
METAL LOCKERS 105113

SECTION 111313 - LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
1.1 PRODUCTS
A. Dock Bumpers:
1. Molded-Rubber Bumpers: Rectangular, (152) (mm) thick.

2. Extruded-Rubber Bumpers: (114-mm-) wide and (102-mm-) deep half-oval shape.
LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313

SECTION 111316 - LOADING DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS
1.1 PRODUCTS
A. Inflatable Dock Seals: Neoprene-coated nylon cover fabric.
B. Inflatable Dock Shelters: Rigid canopy and sides.
1. Framework: Steel.
2. Cover Fabric: Polyurethane-coated nylon.
C. Transparent-Strip Door Curtains:
1. Strip Material: Extruded PVC, low-temperature grade.

2. Strip Width: (203 mm).
3. Overlap: None.
4. Mounting: Header.
LOADING DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS 111316

SECTION 114000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. Sanitation: Equipment certified for compliance with NSF standards by NSF or UL.
B. Electric and Fuel-Burning Equipment: UL listed.
C. Steam Equipment: Complies with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
D. Seismic Restraints: Complies with SMACNA's details.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. Refrigeration Compressors: [Five] 5 years.
1.3 MATERIALS
A. NSF certified.
B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Complies with FDA's regulations for food-contact areas.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Shelving, hand sinks, insect killers, floor drains, faucets, hose reels, sinks, vegetable washer,
vegetable peeler, bone saw, slicers, cutter mixer, food processor, potwasher, walk-in fridges and
freezers, refrigeration system, display cases, hot wells, cold wells, dough sheeter, dough divider,
scales, ingredient bins, mixers, ovens, grills, ranges, exhaust hoods, fridges, freezers, stainless
steel tables, etc. No wood based products.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000

SECTION 118123 – FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT
A. Standards Conformance: All rails and related equipment including trolleys comply with OSHA and
ASME/ANSI/IWCA safety requirements for window cleaning, and various materials standards.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: As per Manufacturer.
1.3 WINDOW WASHING EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. The system should be designed to one of the following standards:
a. U.K.-BS 6037
b. European EN 1808
B. FALL ARREST SYSTEM
FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT 118123

SECTION 118226 - FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS
1.1 WASTE COMPACTORS
A. Waste Compactor: Self-contained horizontal type stationary compactor, liquid tight.
1. Waste-Compactor Standards: ANSI Z245.21 including appendices and NFPA 82.

2. Waste-Container Standards: ANSI Z245.30 and ANSI Z245.60.
3. Compactor capacity 10 CBM
4. Clear Top Opening: 1510 mm x 1320 mm
5. Cycle Time: 29 seconds.
6. Scale Weight: total weight 3280kg
7. Compactor to be installed on floor embedded steel plates with guide rails.
8. Deodorizing Device: Manufacturer's standard
1.2 INSTALLATION
A. Factory-authorized service representative to [perform field-quality-control tests and inspections]

[and] [train Owner's maintenance personnel].
1.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Full-Maintenance Service: [12] months.
FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS 118226

:

perform field-quality-control tests and inspections
and train Owner's maintenance personnel
12

SECTION 120000 - FURNITURE
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Sofas.
2. Armchairs.
3. Coffee tables.
4. Workstations.
A. Samples for sofas, armchairs, coffee tables and workstations.
B. All the materials specified in this section shall comply with the all local Codes and Regulations.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
furniture items that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, that impair furniture's usefulness.

2. Faulty operation of hardware.
3. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear.
B. Warranty Period: As per manufacturer.
1.4 FURNITURE PRODUCT DATA SHEET
A. Products: Items as listed in FF&E schedule.
1.5 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
FURNITURE 120000
SECTION 122200 - CURTAINS AND DRAPES
A. Mockups for each form of drapery.
1.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. LEED v4 :
1. Recycled content.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Drapery Tracks: Manually operated, or Motorized.
B. Draperies:
1. Headings:
a. Pinch (French) Pleats: 100 percent fullness.

b. Stack Pleats: 100 percent fullness.
c. Roll Pleats: 100 percent fullness.
d. Accordion Pleats: 100 percent fullness.
2. Drapery Fabric:
a. Fiber Content: As indicated.

b. Textile Treatments: Stain repellent and flame retardant.
3. Lining Type: Blackout.
a. Fiber Content: As indicated.

b. Textile Treatments: Stain repellent and flame retardant.
4. Interlining: Blackout.
CURTAINS AND DRAPES 122200

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
1.1 PRODUCTS
A. Manual, chain-and-clutch operating mechanism.
B. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller.
C. Installation Accessories: Front fascia.
D. Shade band Materials: Complying with NFPA 701.
1. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven PVC-coated fiberglass and PVC-coated polyester.

2. Light-Blocking Fabric: Fiberglass textile with PVC film bonded to both sides.
E. Product Safety Standard: WCMA A 100.1.
1.2 INSTALLATION
A. Between (inside) or Outside of jamb installation.
B. Factory-authorized representative to train Owner's personnel to maintain motorized operators.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413

SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
A. LEED v4 :
1. Certified wood.
2. Low-emitting adhesives.
3. Low-emitting composite wood.
1.2 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Front: Beveled.
B. Backsplash and End Splash: Beveled edge.
C. Countertops:
1. 12.7 mm thick, solid surface material.

2. Color: black, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Finish: Smooth
D. Integral sinks.
1.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install on supports with adhesive.
END OF SECTION 123661.16
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16

SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
1.1 COMPONENTS
A. Resilient Link Mats: Vinyl link mats with stainless-steel wire link rods.
1. high-end, heavy-duty stainless-steel grid systems.

2. Inserts: Strips of carpet infill between the surface wires.
3. Color: Grey Carpet, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stainless steel Grid
5. Finish: Satin Grid
6. Thickness: 29 mm
B. Rubber-Tire Tiles: Anti-slip flooring, resistant to fungi and odorless.
1. Width: 900 mm
2. Length: 12000 mm
3. Height: 8 mm
C. Recessed Frames: Stainless steel.
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813

SECTION 133423.16 - FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS
A. Accessibility: ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Fabricated Control Booths, General:
1. Building Style: Round corners.

2. Doors: Sliding door on one side.
3. Windows: Horizontal sliding.
4. Glazing: Clear insulating glass.
5. Work Counters: Plastic laminate.
6. Electrical Power Service: 125 A, 120/240-V ac, single phase, three wire.
7. Lighting fixtures.
8. Heating unit.
9. Cooling unit.
10. Accessories: safe.
B. Fabricated Steel Control Booths: Framing of steel structural or mechanical tubing.
1. Finished Floor: Galvanized, rolled steel tread plate with vinyl composition flooring.
2. Wall Panels: Galvanized steel, insulated.
3. Roof/Ceiling Assembly: Galvanized steel, insulated.
4. Canopy fascia.
5. Downspouts.
6. Roof scuppers.
7. Finish: Standard two coats, baked on.
1.3 FABRICATION
A. Lifting: Forklift pockets in base or Lifting eye in roof.
1.4 INSTALLATION
A. Prefabricated control booths anchored to concrete bases.
FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16

SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Electric traction passenger elevators.
A. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applicable
provisions of the following standards:
1. SASO Technical Regulations for Electric Traction Elevators.

2. EN 81-20 and EN 81-50 Standards with all listed normative references, including those
issued by ISO, IEC, CEN and CENELEC and any other standard referred to.
3. BS ISO 8100-30 "Lifts for the transport of persons and goods, Class I, II, III and VI lifts
installation".
4. BS 5655 "Lifts and service Lifts".
5. EN 81- Part 73 "Behaviour of lifts in the event of fire".
6. EN 81- Part 70 "Accessibility to lifts for persons including persons with disability".
7. EN81- Part 58 "Landing doors fire resistance test".
8. EN81- Part 28 "Remote alarm on passenger and goods passenger lifts".
9. EN 81- Part 77 "Lifts subject to seismic conditions".
10. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): EN 12015 (emission) and EN 12016 (immunity).
1.3 ELEVATORS
A. Power Supply: 400 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
B. Machine-Room-Less type, gearless. variable-voltage variable-frequency (VVVF) power drive.
C. Power Regenerative Converter.
D. Auxiliaries: Counterweight, Guide shoes, Guide rails, ropes, safety gear, buffers, etc.
E. Automatic Sliding Car and Landing Doors: power operated type.
F. Control accessories.
G. Emergency communication system.
H. Interface with BMS.
I. Auxiliary Operations:
1. Loaded car bypass.

2. Security key switch for car and hall buttons.
3. Automatic emergency landing system.
4. Auxiliary emergency supply for lighting, fan and controls door nudging.
5. Gong on arrival with pre-recorded sound facility.
6. Curtain infrared detector.
7. Nuisance call cancel.
8. Etc..
J. Passenger Elevator in the “Waste Management Building”:
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 142100

1. Capacity: 630 kg
2. Speed: 1 m/s
3. 2 stops
4. Single entrance, Central Opening Door (i.e. elevator access from same side on both floors).
5. Car Dimensions WxDxH-m: 1.1x1.4x2.3
6. Door Dimensions WxH-m: 0.9x2.1
7. Shaft dimensions (WxD)-m: 2x1.8
8. Overhead: 3.9 m
9. Pit: 1.6 m
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 142100

SECTION 145200 - MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – PRODUCTS
1.1 HEAVY DUTY RACKS
These are coated steel racks made from hot dip galvanized steel used for storage; providing the most
selectivity and flexibility, and having but not limited to the following features:
A. Uprights, braces, and beams constructed of high tensile steel.

B. A lower beam is required for pallets positioned on floor.
C. Rack dimensions L x W x H: 2700mmx1000mmx5000mm
D. Ready to assemble, solid steel construction.
E. Standard deflection shall be a maximum of 1/200 of the beam length.
F. Beam Capacity:4000 Kg/pair of beam/level
G. Beams to have special safety lock preventing the accidental beam removal.
H. Racks can be placed back-to-back, creating a double-deep rack arrangement.
I. Racks shall be used in standard aisle configuration and very narrow aisles.
J. Coating of steel racks shall be factory applied, and according to manufacturer’s standard.
K. Ram rack column protection to be provided.
L. Crash Barriers used to protect the exposed upright frames at the end of each aisle by
forklift collusion.
M. Mesh decking on the top of the beam on each level and section of the pallet racking
storage. Mesh decking shall be 6mm diameter with reinforcing bar support.
N. Provision for storage items identification system (barcode or labeling) to be provided.
1.2 STORAGE CANTILEVER RACKS
These are coated hot dip galvanized steel racks used for storage of pipes and furniture; providing the most
selectivity and flexibility, and having but not limited to the following features:
A. Uprights, braces and beams constructed of high tensile steel.

B. Frames shall be highly rigid with cold formed uprights. Uprights shall be punched with lug
holes for ease of adjustability.
C. Steel braces of C-section profiles shall be bolted to the uprights in a constant zigzag pattern
using bolts and lock nuts.
D. Used for the storage of different pipe and furniture sizes.
E. Ready to assemble, solid steel construction.
F. Standard deflection shall be a maximum of 1/200 of the beam length.
G. Arm Capacity minimum:1000 Kg/arm
H. Beams to have special safety lock preventing the accidental beam removal.
I. Racks can be placed back-to-back. And provided with pipe stop/end stop.
J. Coating of steel racks shall be factory applied, and according to manufacturer’s standard.
K. Ram rack column protection to be provided.
L. Dimensions of unit between 2 consecutive arms: 1000x1000x5000
M. Provision for storage items identification system (barcode or labeling) to be provided.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Test equipment at site with overload of 25%, do no proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions has been corrected.
MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 145200 - 1

2.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturers’ installation instructions.
B. Contractor shall obtain end-user/client approval on the selected models of the storage
equipment prior material acceptance and shipment to site.
C. Storage equipment shall be selected compatible with the materials handling equipment
according to end-user/Client preference for the type of equipment.
2.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of manufacturers authorized service representatives to instruct owner’s

personnel in operation and maintenance.
MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 145200 - 2

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Related Provisions:
1. NEO-CON-EMR-000002 -Special Procedures for Traffic Control
2. NEO-CON-EMR-000003 -Fire Safety Requirements
3. NEO-CON-EMR-000004 -Access Control and Site Security
4. NEO-CON-EMR-000005 -Site Logistics Planning
5. NEO-CON-EMR-000006 -Temporary Facilities and Controls
6. NEO-CON-EMR-000007 -Survey Activities
7. NEO-CON-EMR-000008 -Final cleaning
8. NEO-CON-EMR-000009 –Commissioning
9. NEO-CON-EMR-000010 -Operation Readiness
10. NEO-CON-EMR-000012 -Submittal Procedures
11. NEO-CON-EMR-000013 -Information Submittals
12. NEO-CON-EMR-000014 -Reviews and Approvals process
13. NEO-CON-EMR-000015 -Regulatory Requirements
14. NEO-CON-EMR-000016 -Factory Acceptance Testing
15. NEO-CON-EMR-000017 -Protection of Existing Underground Utilities and Cables
16. NEO-CON-EMR-000018 -Project Identifications and Signs
17. NEO-CON-EMR-000019 -Product Requirements
18. NEO-CON-EMR-000020 -Cutting and Patching works
19. NEO-CON-EMR-000021 -Closeout procedures and DNP attendance
20. NEO-CON-EMR-000022 -Hot Works Operations
21. NEO-CON-EMR-000023 -Operation and Maintenance Documents
22. NEO-CON-EMR-000024 –Warranties
23. NEO-CON-EMR-000025 -Project Record Documents
24. NEO-CON-EMR-000026 -Spare parts, Tools and extra stock materials
25. NEO-CON-EMR-000027 -Demonstration and Training
26. NEO-CON-EMR-000028 -Contractor's Project Management and coordination
27. NEO-CON-EMR-000029 -Contractor’s Works Coordination Responsibility
28. NEO-CON-EMR-000030 -Coordination with Tenant Areas
29. NEO-PCO-EMR-000004 -Engineering Progress Reporting
30. NEOM-NEV-EMR-401 -Regenerative developments in Planning, Design, Construction.
31. NEOM Geotechnical Investigation Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-001)
32. NEOM Design Stages Deliverables (NEOM-NEN-PRC-005)
33. NEOM Safety in Design Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-006)
34. Value Engineering Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-007)
35. NEOM Document Numbering and Revision Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-008)
36. NEOM BIM & GIS Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-009)
37. NEOM Drawing and Drafting Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-010)
38. NEOM Site Specific Seismic Hazard Study Procedure (NEOM-EN-PRC-011) (if needed,
depending on the results of ground investigation)
39. NEOM Standards and Codes Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-014)
40. NEOM Asset Naming Conventions Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-020)
41. NEOM Handing Over Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-022)
42. NEOM Plan of Work (NEOM-NEN-PRC-029)
43. NEOM Quality Requirement for Contractors (NEOM-NEN-SHC-002)
44. NEOM OSH and FS Requirements for Contractors – Schedule H (NEOM-NEN-SCH-001)
45. NEOM List of Technical Codes and Standards (NEOM-NEN-SCH-005)
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING 210500

46. NEOM Cost Estimation Procedure (NEOM-NEN-PRC-001)

47. NEOM Environmental Procedure and Guidelines
48. NEOM Environmental & Social Risk Assessment Procedure (NEOM-NEV-PRC-601)
49. NEOM Construction Environmental & Social Management Plan Template and Guidance
(NEOM-NEV-TGD-602)
50. NEOM Environmental and Social Code of Practice for Construction (NEOM-NEV-TGD-
702)
51. NEOM ENVID Workbook Template (NEOM-NEV-TEM-004)
52. NEOM Procedure for Regenerative Development (NEOM-EN-PRC-016)
53. NEOM-NEV-STD 501 Standard and NEOM-NEV-PRC 501 Procedure
54. NEOM-NEV full set of documentation and associated forms and tools including PRC 016;
PRC 501; PRC 601; PRC 701 and PRC 801
55. NEOM Design Management Plan (NEOM-NPR-PLN-001)
56. Other NEOM requirements (Cash flow reporting, progress reporting, planning and
scheduling, Environment and sustainability, etc.).
1.2 ACCURACY OF DATA AND CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. The design drawings are diagrammatic and they may not show all physical arrangements, offsets,
bends, or elbows which may be required for installation of various materials, equipment, piping,
and ductwork systems in allotted spaces. The Contractor shall examine these and other available
drawings to determine space limitations and interferences. The Contractor shall be responsible for
making any minor changes in location of equipment, pipe and ductwork from that shown on
drawings and for all physical details required for installation. Cost for adapting Contractor's work
to jobsite conditions shall not be considered as basis of an extra cost to contract. The Contractor
shall get approval before proceeding with any change.
B. Information pertaining to new and existing conditions that are described in the specifications or
appear on drawings are based on available records. While such data has been collected with
reasonable care, there is no expressed or implied guarantee that conditions so indicated are entirely
representative of those actually existing or that unlooked for developments may not occur. Such
information is merely provided to assist the Contractor in his investigation of conditions.
C. The Contractor must carefully examine the drawings, specifications and project site, and verify all
measurements, distances, levels, materials, equipment, etc. before starting work.
D. Drawings shall not be scaled for determining exact dimensions or location of equipment.
E. All works not shown on drawings in complete detail shall be installed in conformance with
accepted standard practice and manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. All items shall be installed in a manner and in locations avoiding all obstructions, preserving
headroom and keeping openings and passageways clear. Changes shall be made to the location of
equipment and materials as may be necessary in order to meet this requirement.
G. Work indicated on drawings, but not mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa, shall be
performed as if specifically mentioned or indicated by both.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction
F. UL: Underwriters Laboratories
G. FM: Factory Mutual
1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. All systems, materials, equipment and procedures associated with Fire Protection Systems shall be
in accordance with NFPA requirements as well as the local civil defense code and SBC 801
requirements
B. Unless indicated otherwise, sprinkler protection shall be provided in all areas except where
omission is allowed by NFPA 13
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Comply with additional requirements specified below and in different sections of division 21
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall be produced as required in the contract documents in addition to the
following points
2. Shop drawings shall be new drawings prepared by the Contractor and shall not be
reproductions or tracings of the contract drawings.
a. Drawings shall be overlaid with shop drawings of other trades and checked for
conflicts.
b. Shop drawings shall identify the related contract drawing number or related
reference drawing.
c. Shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned, including both plan and elevation
dimensions from building reference points.
d. Shop drawings shall show schedules and description of equipment, valves, piping
and fittings
e. Shop drawings shall show complete system layout of equipment, components,
plumbing fixtures, piping, indicating service clearances, and pipe sizes, fitting types
and sizes and hanger support locations.
f. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
g. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
h. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
i. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
j. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
k. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
l. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
m. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into
building during construction.
n. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

o. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and
inlets, light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access
panels and other ceiling-mounted items.
p. Mechanical equipment rooms.
q. Interstitial space.
r. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
s. Pipe sleeves.
3. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:

a. Complete floor plans with firefighting to a minimum of 1/50 scale.
b. Firefighting plant rooms to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
c. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
d. Fabricated equipment to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
4. Submit shop drawings for review as required by the contract documents. Additional shop
drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues are not clearly
resolved, when there is a question as to whether contract documents are being complied
with or the design intent is not being met.
D. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
E. Product Data:
1. In line with contract documents and requirements specified in different sections of division
21
2. The Contractor shall conform to any requirements with respect to ensuring that products,
components and materials comply with any referenced standard. Such requirements may
include, but not be limited to, samples, test results and supporting documentation
3. The Contractor shall supply original authenticated certificates for each type of material or
equipment, confirming the standard they have been manufactured and tested to.
F. Calculations:
1. Submit full hydraulic calculations prepared as per NFPA requirements for all the Fire
Fighting systems and covering all the different critical scenarios. The calculations shall be
used to verify the duty of the fire pumps or utility connection requirements, pipe sizing and
requirements of PRVs. All changes resulting from the approved hydraulic calculations shall
be under the scope of the contractor.
2. Submit detailed calculation for the clean agent system
3. Submit detailed calculation for the foam systems and any special pre-engineered system
shown on the plans
G. Submit proof of license to undertake work as issued by the appropriate AHJ.
H. Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be clearly denoted in
English and the native language of the area where the project is located.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and
identification, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the standards
listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
C. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
D. Electrical Characteristics for Fire Fighting Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
E. Installer shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
incorporating firefighting systems and equipment similar to that required for the project and
licensed by the AHJ to undertake such works.
F. Components shall be UL listed and/or FM approved.
G. All Material and equipment shall be new, unless stated otherwise and approved by the employer.
H. Manufacturer’s written directions and recommendations shall be followed. If these instructions

are different from the contract documents or referenced international standards, the more stringent
requirements shall establish the minimum standard. Any conflict shall be brought to the attention
of the engineer for clarification. Prior to the execution of the work.
I. All electrical work related to Fire Fighting items shall be as specified under Division 26,
Electrical.
J. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
K. Corrosion resistant materials shall be used as described where required as per project design.
L. Equipment and materials to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed,
manufactured and listed or approved for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse
effects of weather prevailing at the project location. The additional protective measures against
outdoor weather required by the manufacturers’ installation instructions and prevalent practice
shall be provided.
M. Where two or more equipment or components are of the same class, the same manufacturer shall
be used for selecting the equipment; component parts of the entire system need not be products of
the same manufacturer.
N. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in
its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be
encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.
O. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a

conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or
otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.
P. Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors
Q. All equipment with moving parts shall be protected against personal injury
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.

B. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling, transport,
warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items, at no additional cost, as
instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it is proven that the damage was
caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.
C. Protect stored sprinklers, pipes, tubes, flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and
dirt. Elevate above grade.
D. Hose reels/racks, fire extinguishers and fire blankets shall be covered in protective packaging and
stored on well compartmented racks or shelving. Fire extinguishers, shall be secured to prevent
damage resulting from falling and in no instance shall they be subject to temperatures in excess of
52 ºC or to direct sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for Fire Fighting installations.
C. For large equipment make provisions for the necessary openings in the building to allow for
admittance of all equipment before closing in.
D. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components as they are constructed.
E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for Fire Fighting items requiring access for
operation, service or maintenance that are concealed behind finished surfaces whether indicated on
plans or not . Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
F. Coordinate connection of Fire Fighting systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services where required.
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
1.9 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. The entire firefighting system including all materials, components, equipment and accessories and
their installation shall conform to the requirements of the Authority having jurisdiction and / or the
Civil Defense Requirements.
B. AHJ requirements for permit approval shall be considered mandatory to the construction
C. All local codes and regulations shall become part of this specification and must be adhered to
where they exceed requirements as shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications, without
additional cost to the Contract. Contract documents may contain more stringent requirements than
the code.

1.10 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt or change existing services. When interruption is required, temporary equipment
or pipe installation or relocation will be required and shall be provided to maintain continuity of
operation of existing facilities.
1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall provide operating and maintenance instruction manuals covering each and
every item of equipment and devices furnished or erected by the Contractor prior to "Substantial
Completion" as required by Division 1.
B. Each separate manual shall consist of the following:
1. Neatly typewritten table of contents including contractor's name, address and telephone
number; list of each product referenced in manual; and name, address and telephone
number of installing contractor and maintenance contractor for each product.
2. Tabbed sections of catalog data and literature for each product including model number,
description and component parts; operating procedures; maintenance procedures; servicing
and lubrication schedules; description of sequence of operations; parts lists; illustrations,
assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance; any additional drawings,
diagrams, charts or written text which may be required to supplement product data for
particular installation; certified test and balance report; list of control point labels, and
wiring diagrams.
3. Copy of warranty, bond and/or service contract issued for each product including an
information sheet for operations personnel with proper procedures in event of a product
failure and instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
4. Full size sheets, if required, shall be folded into special holding pockets. Faxed,
handwritten, or illegible materials are not acceptable.
C. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct designated facility operating and maintenance
personnel on operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. Review
contents of operating and maintenance manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects
of operations and maintenance.
1.12 PROTECTION OF ROOF
A. Contractors are cautioned that they must exercise extreme care in any activity involving contact
with any installed roof membrane.
B. Construct protective plywood (3/4 in. thick) runways across the roof for moving, setting, and
installing equipment and piping systems. No activity on the roof will be permitted without this
protection. Start runways at the point of origin of any equipment placed on roof and terminate at
the point of installation on curb or base. Any and all repairs necessary to bring the roofing system
to its original condition shall be made by an approved Roofing Contractor and paid for by the
Contractor responsible for the damage
1.13 WORK COORDINATION
A. All Trades shall work in cooperation with each other, and fit their work into the structure as job
conditions may demand. In general, priority shall be arranged as follows: (in order of preference)
1. Recessed lighting fixtures

2. Piping which must be drainable
3. Sheet metal ductwork
4. Lighting fixtures

5. Plumbing waste lines, downspouts, vents and sprinkler piping

6. Gravity water lines
7. Heating hot and chilled water lines
8. Refrigerant lines
9. Plumbing water and gas and air lines
10. Electrical conduit
11. Control wiring conduit
1.14 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of underground service, utilities, structures, etc., which
may be encountered or be affected by his work and shall be responsible for any damage caused by
neglect to provide proper precautions or protection.
1.15 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Training of Owner’s personnel shall include:
1. A minimum of 8 hours of on-site overview of the overall Firefighting System.

2. Refer to Division 21 sections for specific training on each of the components of the Fire
Fighting System.
1.16 WELDING
A. The below compliments other divisions of section 21
B. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the suitability
of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the required tests, and also
determine that the welding operators have the ability to make sound welds under standard
conditions.
2. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1 Comply with the set standards in the
specification..
3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping sy s
tems. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the
piping and systems.
C. Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for fusion welding
shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify processes and
operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1 /B2.1M, and / or, as approved by the Qualifications."
D. Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Engineer, to determine the ability of the
welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including
welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed
to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds
with his specific code marking signifying his name and number as signed.
E. Provide the Engineer with a list of names and corresponding code markings. Retest welders who
fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications. Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for
work on the project.

F. Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame cutting. Where
beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and oxidation just
prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.
G. Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes above 50 mm to
assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of weld spatter reaching the
interior of the pipe.
H. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during, or
after installation.
I. Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during or after
installation.
J. Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over
the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be re-
qualified.
K. Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and dampness during
the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating.
1.17 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Refer to Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment section,
for sound and vibration requirements.
B. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or vibration,
noticeable sound outside the room in which moving equipment are installed, or annoyingly
noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.
C. Conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved means and as directed.
D. Vibration control shall be designed, tested and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. Comply with special warranties listed in individual section of Division 21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

B. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 10 years prior to
bid opening. The 10-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size however, digital electronics devices, software and systems such
as controls, instruments, Operator interface devices, shall be of the current generation of
technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record. The 10-year experience
shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the
commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 10 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
C. Products shall be supported by a local service organization, authorized and trained by the
manufacturer of the equipment supplied. System components shall be environmentally suitable
for the indicated locations.
D. Material and equipment shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a complete
inventory of repair parts and is reasonably located within the project reach
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. All items shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions as well as the local civil defense requirements.
B. The installation shall comply fully with all applicable standards and codes listed in individual
sections of Division 21.
C. Landing valves, Hose reels and fire extinguishers shall be securely fixed with approved fixings in
a position offering unobstructed access.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or cutting.
B. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects passing through.
C. Do not pierce beams or columns without written permission from the structural engineer and then
only as directed.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 for installation of fire protection piping
materials.

D. Install drain piping at low points of piping systems.
E. Install pressure gages at top of each standpipe.
F. Install manual shutoff at each audible alarm station.
G. Install test connection where indicated, and at most remote point from risers.
H. Make sprinkler piping connections to the top of cross mains and feed mains.
I. Provide flush and test connections at ends of cross and feed mains.
J. Provide dedicated supports for the firefighting piping. Common supports with other building
services shall not be utilized.
K. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
N. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
O. Install piping free of sags and bends.
P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Q. Install piping to allow application of insulation where required.
R. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
S. Size reduction shall be made using reducing fittings; bushings are not acceptable.
T. Independently support piping so that its weight shall not be supported by the equipment to which it
is connected.
U. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping,
bushings are not acceptable.
V. Cover ends of piping during installation to keep inside of piping clean.
W. Piping shall not be routed through electrical rooms or transformer vaults, or above transformers,
panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the
piping is serving this equipment.
X. Use only wrenches having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass specialties;
wrench marks not permitted.
Y. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
Z. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors in finished spaces.
AA. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

BB. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
CC. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
DD. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
EE. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
FF. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
GG. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
HH. Conveniently locate control panels, hardware and devices, valves, gauges, cleanout fittings, and
other equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs, or
removal and replacement.
II. Install gauges to be easily read from floors, platforms, and walkways.
JJ. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install Fire Fighting equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Handle, transport and store sprinklers with care to prevent damage. Use only wrenches supplied by
manufacturer to tighten sprinklers in fittings.
B. Install sprinklers only in position for which they are designed.
C. Do not alter or apply ornamentation, coatings or paint to sprinklers. Exercise care when painting
sprinkler piping to avoid touching sprinklers with paint.
3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Refer to Division 21 specification section "Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and
Equipment."
B. Relocate devices Identifying the items for unobstructed view in finished construction
3.7 PAINTING
A. Painting of Fire Fighting systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor Fire Fighting materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.9 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.10 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor Fire
Fighting
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.11 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for Fire Fighting equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.12 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Complete all phases of work so the system, equipment, and components can be checked out,
started, calibrated, operationally tested, adjusted, balanced, functionally tested, and otherwise
commissioned. Complete systems, including all subsystems, so they are fully functional.
B. Testing and commissioning shall be as required under the applicable sections of Division 21.
C. Additional tests may be required in the case of products, materials, and equipment if:
1. Submitted items are altered, changed, or cannot be determined as exactly conforming to the
Contract Documents.
3.13 PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING
A. The following shall be provided:
1. Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment until Substantial
Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.
2. Protect installed Work.
3. In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as required.
4. Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pumps, compressors and similar
equipment.
5. Interior of piping shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, and other foreign materials.

6. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive,
labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass
Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
7. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections
and control portions of sprinkler piping.
8. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in
service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under
pressure as specified in NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to
ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.

SECTION 210513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
B. Refer to Section 210500 “Common Work Results for Fire Fighting” for applicable NEOM
provisions.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification,
as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the standards listed below in
this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Comply with NEMA MG1.
C. Comply with IEC 60034.
D. Comply with IEC 60072.
E. Comply with IEC 60529.
1.3 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
E. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.
1.4 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-12, unless other-
wise recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque applications.
B. The maximum starting current characteristic classification shall be in accordance with IEC 60034-
12.
C. Motors shall be capable of continuous operation at any frequency variation between +2% and -4%,
and voltage variations of ±5%. The maximum voltage and frequency variations may occur
simultaneously.
D. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 46.1 deg C and at altitude of 625 m above sea
level.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT 210513

E. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous running duty
to IEC 60034-1, unless otherwise indicated. Motors used for excessive intermittent periodic opera-
tion shall be suitably designed for the expected number of starts. Motors’ dimensions shall comply
with NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 as applicable.
F. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
G. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1 or IC
411 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer
and approved by the Engineer.
H. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to NEMA
MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally enclosed, water to air cooled (TEWAC) to
NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable. Enclosure type shall be as recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to IEC
60529 for indoor motors as a minimum .
J. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient tempera-
ture, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer
for specific applications such as: overhead cranes or submersible pumps, where temperature rise
not exceeding 105 deg. C may be used.
K. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1 or
Class I to IEC 60034-18-41and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1 or high ef-
ficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30.
L. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.
M. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection and
shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection (surge arrestor and surge capacitor).
Enough space shall be provided below main terminal box for cable connection.
N. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding protection
for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above and for all low voltage VFD motors.
O. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and bear-
ing protection for all medium voltage motors.
P. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller suppliers to
ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory operation.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. Polyphase Motors: Design B, medium induction motors.
1. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1 or class IE3 to IEC 60034-30

unless otherwise indicated.
2. Service Factor: 1.15.
3. Stator: Copper windings unless otherwise indicated.
4. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
5. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
6. Bearings:Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
7. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

8. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature rise 80 deg. C
and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as indicated in paragraph 2.1 M
above..
9. Code Letter Designation:
a. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

b. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
10. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
B. Additional Requirements for Polyphase Motors:
1. Motors used with reduced-voltage and multispeed controllers.

2. Premium-efficient and inverter-duty motors used with variable-frequency controllers.
3. Severe-duty motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.15 minimum
service factor to NEMA MG1 and IEEE 841.
C. Single-Phase Motors:
1. Motors Larger Than 1/20 HP: Permanent-split capacitor; split phase; capacitor start,
inductor run; or capacitor start, capacitor run to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application. Class B insulation may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
3. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
4. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
5. Internal thermal protection.

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
provisions.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials and installation for sleeves and
sleeve seals for fire suppression piping, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code –
General“, SBC 201, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
1.3 SLEEVES WITHOUT WATERSTOP
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of ductile iron, with plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, with
plain ends.
C. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A 53M, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
D. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, with nailing flange.
1.4 SLEEVES WITH WATERSTOP
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ductile iron, with plain ends and integral waterstop
collar.
B. Manufactured, HDPE or ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel

sleeve-type, waterstop assembly for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.
1.5 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Manufactured, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral cast flashing flange, with underdeck
clamp.
1.6 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Field-assembled, modular sealing-element unit for filling annular space between piping and
sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517

1.7 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, factory packaged; ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B.
1.8 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade: Sleeves with waterstops.
1. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves
2. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves
B. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade: Sleeves with waterstops.
1. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
2. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Sleeves with waterstops.
1. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) : Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
D. Concrete Slabs above Grade that are Not Fire Rated nor Smoke Rated: Sleeves with waterstops.
1. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves.
2. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves.
E. Interior Walls and Partitions that are Not Fire Rated nor Smoke Rated: Sleeves without
waterstops.
1. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized Steel pipe sleeves
2. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
provisions.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations, for materials, and installation for escutcheons for
fire suppression piping, and as per the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece deep pattern.
2. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece steel one-piece cast brass or split-plate steel with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
3. Insulated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
4. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with
polished, chrome-plated finish or One-piece cast brass with polished brass finish.
5. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with polished,
chrome-plated finish or One-piece cast brass with polished brass finish.
6. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated
finish or One-piece cast brass with rough-brass finish.
7. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish or
One-piece cast brass with rough brass finish.
B. Floor Plates: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518

SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
provisions.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for vibration and seismic controls, as listed in, but
not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code-General”, SBC 201, “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501,
and “Saudi Fire Code” SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear
anchorage preapproval by ICC-ES or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent
testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable,
submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer.
A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Applicable Wind-Restraint Loading Reference: Comply with SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7-
10.
2. Basic Wind Speed (3 second gust): 45 m/s.
3. Risk Category: II as per SBC 201.
4. Exposure Category: D as per SBC 201.
B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Applicable Seismic-Restraint Reference: Comply with SBC 201 and ASCE 7-10.
2. Building Site Classification: D.
3. Building importance factor = 1.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 5% Critical damping
Ss=0.55g.
S1 =0.13g.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210548
1.4 COMPONENTS
A. Vibration Isolators:
1. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for
uniform loading over pad area. Material to be oil and water resistant with elastomeric
properties.
a. Sandwich Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

b. Surface Pattern: Smooth, ribbed, or waffle pattern.
c. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
d. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
2. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: Molded, oil- and water-resistant rubber,

neoprene, or other elastomeric material.
3. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints;
molded, oil-resistant elastomeric material with cast-ductile-iron or welded-steel housing.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Pipe–Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel
tubes separated by a minimum 13-mm-thick neoprene.
a. Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops.

b. Maximum Load Per Support: 3.45 MPa on isolation material providing equal
isolation in all directions.
6. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post-and-sleeve

arrangement separated by a minimum 13-mm-thick neoprene.
B. Seismic-Restraint Devices:
1. Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes and replaceable resilient isolation washers and
bushings.
a. Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts: Secure to concrete surface with post-installed

concrete anchors. Anchors to be seismically prequalified in accordance with
ACI 355.2;0, drill in, and stud-wedge or female wedge type.
b. Preset Concrete Inserts: Seismically prequalified in accordance with ICC-ES AC446
testing.
c. Anchors in Masonry: Design in accordance with TMS 402.
d. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
2. Restraints - Rigid: MFMA-4, shop- or field- fabricated bracing assembly made of

AISI S110-07-S1 slotted steel channels, ANSI/ASTM A53/A53M steel pipe as per
NFPA 13, or other rigid steel brace member.
3. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil and water-resistant
elastomeric material, with a flat washer face.
5. Anchor Bolts: Mechanical or Adhesive type, seismic rated, tested according to
ASTM E488/E488M.
6. Post-installed concrete anchors must comply with all requirements of IBC.
a. Prequalify post-installed anchors in concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 or other

approved qualification testing procedures.

FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210548
SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
provisions.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for identification fire suppression piping and
equipment, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the standards
B. Quality Standard for Piping Identification: ASME A13.1.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Equipment Labels: Polished brass or aluminum, 0.8 mm thick, with fasteners.
B. Warning Signs and Labels: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 3.2
mm thick, with fasteners.
C. Pipe Labels: Pretensioned.
D. Stencils: Brass.
E. Valve Tags: Polished brass or aluminum, 0.8 mm thick, with brass wire link chain, beaded chain,
or S-hook fasteners.
F. Warning Tags: 75 by 133 mm minimum; brass grommet and wire fasteners.
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553

SECTION 210800 - COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
provisions.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for fire suppression commissioning, and as per
the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Clean-Agent Fire-Suppression Systems Testing Qualifications:
1. Journey level or equivalent skill level. Vocational school four-year-program graduate or an

Associate's degree in mechanical systems, fire-suppression systems, or similar field.
Degree requirement may be offset by three years' experience in servicing fire-suppression
systems in the clean-agent fire-suppression systems industry.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured
by approved manufacturer.
C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:
1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.
2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags
permanently affixed to the instrument being used.
3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on
Project.
4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.
D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:
1. Equipment manufacturer's proprietary instrumentation and tools for installed equipment

included in the Cx process are to comply with the following:
a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Fire-suppression system proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of

Employer at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.3 Cx PROCESS
A. Perform Cx process in accordance with NEOM commissioning requirements and NFPA 3, Cx

standards acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800

1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST
A. Preliminary detailed construction checklists prepared under NEOM commissioning requirements

provisions for each fire-suppression system, assembly, subsystem, equipment, and component
required to be commissioned, as detailed in NFPA 3.
B. Additional Systems Required to Be Commissioned:
1. Fire-suppression sprinkler systems, including the following:
a. Wet-pipe sprinkler piping, fittings, sprinklers, specialties, controls and accessories.

b. Dry-pipe sprinkler piping, fittings, sprinklers, specialties, controls and accessories.
c. Pre-action, deluge sprinkler piping, fittings, sprinklers, specialties, controls and
accessories.
d. Fire pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.
e. Pressure-maintenance pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.
f. Compressed-air piping, compressors, motors, accessories, and controls.
g. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
h. Meters and gauges.
i. General-duty and specialty valves.
j. Hangers and supports.
k. Heat tracing.
l. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
m. Identification.
n. Insulation.
2. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing systems, including the following:
a. Piping, fittings, outlets, and specialties.

b. Storage tanks, manifolds, mounting devices, controls, and accessories.
c. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
d. Meters and gauges.
e. General-duty and specialty valves.
f. Hangers and supports.
g. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
h. Identification.
i. Insulation.
3. Documentation:
a. Fire-suppression system operating manuals.

b. Documentation of required Cx.
c. Documentation of required operator training.
4. Contractor to prepare a testing and commissioning plan and individual method statements
for all systems that will be tested and commissioned
COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 210800

SECTION 211119 - FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
provisions.
identification, as listed in the, but not limited to, “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the standards
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
A. Seismic Performance: shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7 and SBC 201.
1.4 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Exposed-Type Fire-Department Connection:
1. Standard: UL 405.
2. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.
3. Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast-brass.
5. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA P1963.
6. Extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.
7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
8. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.
9. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.
10. Number of Inlets: As per fire system flow rate and according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department sizes and threads.
11. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR."
12. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
13. Outlet Size: As per fire system flow rate.
B. Flush-Type Fire-Department Connection:
2. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.
4. Body Material: Cast brass.
5. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963.
6. Extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119

7. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

8. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.
9. Outlet: With pipe threads.
10. Body Style: Horizontal.
11. Number of Inlets: As per fire system flow rate and according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department sizes and threads.
12. Outlet Location: As indicated on Drawings.
13. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR."
14. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
15. Outlet Size: As per fire system flow rate.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
provisions.
identification, as listed in the “Saudi Building Code – General”, SBC 201, and “Saudi Fire Code”,
SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of fire-
suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
F. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency

acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
H. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13D, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- and Two-Family Dwellings and
Manufactured Homes."
3. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Low-Rise Residential Occupancies."
4. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
5. NFPA 230, "Standard for the Fire Protection of Storage."
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313

A. Quality Standards: NFPA 13, NFPA 70, and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including
losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: as per NFPA 13 requirements.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 4.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 6.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 8.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m area.
d. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 6.1 mm/min. over entire area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 8.1 mm/min. over entire area.
c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Maximum protection area per sprinkler according to NFPA 13 requirements.
B. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7. See Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."
1.4 PIPING AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
A. Standard-Weight, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade A or B, seamless Type S hot-dip galvanized-steel

pipe where indicated; Schedule 40.
B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight,

seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.
D. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick.
a. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face
gaskets.
b. Class 250, Cast Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.

2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Pressure Rating: 1200-kPa minimum.
2. Galvanized or Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
K. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM Global-approved, 1200-kPa pressure rating with steel
housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.
L. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
M. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with grooved-end fittings.
N. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, DN 100 and Smaller:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe and uncoated, plain-end-pipe fittings.
O. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, DN 125 and Larger:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends and welding fittings.
1.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 for hangers and supports material and installation.
1.6 SPRINKLER MATERIALS
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
B. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 1200-kPa minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
D. Sprinkler Types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers as
indicated.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers.
5. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers
where indicated.

E. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
4. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
5. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to
acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
6. Sidewall dry type sprinklers 11.2 K factor for cold rooms application.
F. Sprinkler Guards: UL 199, Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
1.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
B. Pressure Rating:
1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 1200-kPa minimum.

2. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 1725-kPa minimum.
C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Size: Same as connected piping.
E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F. Alarm valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 1200-kPa minimum
3. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gauges, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
4. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Zone/Floor Control Valves:
1. Floor control valves assembly consisting of UL listed FM approved indicating-type floor

control valve with supervisory switch, pressure gauge, water flow switch , test drain
valve assembly and check valve; installation and piping arrangement to be as per NFPA
13 appendix A
2. Floor control valves rated for minimum of 1200 Pa working pressure
H. Deluge valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 1200-kPa minimum
3. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gauges, drip
cup assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, and fill-line
attachment with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection.
4. Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber pressure, globe valve for
manual operation of deluge valve, and connection for actuation device.
5. Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and water-pressure gages;
low-air-pressure warning switch; air- relief valve; and actuation device. Dry, pilot-line

actuator includes cast-iron, 1200-kPa working-pressure, air- operated, diaphragm-type

valve with resilient facing plate, resilient diaphragm, and replaceable bronze seat. Valve
includes threaded water and air inlets and water outlet. Loss of air pressure on dry, pilot-
line side allows pilot-line actuator to open and causes deluge valve to open immediately.
I. Pressure-Regulating Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1468
3. Design: Brass. Include DN40 or DN65, female NPS inlet and outlet; adjustable setting
feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as indicated.
4. Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
J. Automatic (ball drip) drain valves.
K. Air Vents: Automatic or Automatic assembly.
1. Standard: UL listed or FM Global approved for use in wet-pipe fire sprinkler systems.
2. Minimum Water Working Pressure Rating: 1207 kPa.
1.8 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch outlet fittings.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
B. Flow detection and test assemblies.
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
C. Branch line testers.
2. Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa.
3. Body Material: Brass.
D. Sprinkler inspector's test fittings.
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
E. Adjustable drop nipples.
3. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons:

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or Chrome-plated steel, two piece,
with 25-mm vertical adjustment.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
1.9 ALARM DEVICES
A. Water-motor-operated alarm.
2. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
3. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
B. Electrically operated alarm bell.
1. Electric Bell:
a. Standard: UL 464.
b. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
c. Finish: Red-enamel or polyester powder-coat factory finish, suitable for outdoor use
with approved and listed weatherproof backbox.
2. Strobe/Horn:
a. Standard: UL 464.
b. Tone: Selectable, steady, Temporal-3 (T-3) in accordance with ISO 8201 and
ANSI/ASA S3.41, 2400 Hz, electromechanical, broadband.
c. Finish: Red, suitable for outdoor use with approved and listed weatherproof
backbox. White letters on housing identifying device as for “Fire.”
C. Water-flow indicators.
2. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised, vane-type water-flow detector.
3. Type: Paddle operated.
D. Pressure switches.
2. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
E. Valve supervisory switches.
2. Type: Electrically supervised.
F. Indicator-post supervisory switches.
2. Type: Electrically supervised.

1.10 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Listed in UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” or FM Global’s “Approval Guide” for
hydraulic operation, with union, DN 15 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve.
1.11 CONTROL PANELS
A. Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of
deluge valves, with electric or hydraulic-operation, manual control stations.
1. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide"

when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring.
1.12 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Standard: UL 393.
B. 0- to 1725-kPa minimum range.
1.13 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than
system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
E. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers: Use the follDN100 and Smaller: Schedule 40 galvanized steel
pipe with threaded ends, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN125 and DN150 : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
F. Wet-Pipe, Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following:
(NPS 1 to 1-1/2)DN40 and Smaller: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with threaded ends, malleable-iron
threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN50 : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with threaded ends, malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints.
3. DN65 to DN75 : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-
end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
4. DN100 : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
provisions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Permit approved drawings, prepared according to NFPA 2001.
identification, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code”, SBC 201, 501 and “Saudi
Fire Code” SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. FM Approved and NRTL-listed components.
C. Listing in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
E. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label clean-agent extinguishing systems to comply with
NFPA 2001, "Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems."
F. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
A. Design clean-agent fire-extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities having
jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, Class B, or Class C fires as appropriate for areas being
protected, and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable for
normally occupied areas.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
C. UL Compliance: Provide equipment components complying with UL 1058, "Halogenated Agent

Extinguishing System Units," and are UL listed for clean-agent extinguishing system units in UL's
"Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
D. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined in accordance with NFPA 13, ASCE/SEI 7 and SBC 201, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads.".
CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 212200

1.5 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEMS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain clean-agent systems from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Description: Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total

flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity above the ceiling, below the ceiling, and
below the raised floor. System includes separate zones above and below the ceiling and beneath
the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, extinguishing agent shall be
discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected below the ceiling, extinguishing agent
shall be discharged in zones above and below the ceiling and below the floor. If smoke is detected
above the ceiling, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the zone above the ceiling only.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Discharge IG-541 (INERGEN) within 60 seconds and maintain 38 percent concentration

by volume at 21 deg C for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas. Minimum 15-MPa
calculated working pressure upstream from orifice union, minimum 6895-kPa calculated
working pressure downstream from orifice union, and 15-MPa initial charging pressure.
D. Detection: Cross zoned.
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. Extinguishing-Agent Containers: ASME-code steel tanks, with manifold for multiple storage
containers and with reserve-supply storage containers.
B. Extinguishing Agent: IG-541.
C. Discharge Nozzles: Manufacturer’s standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy.
D. A pressure relief vent shall be provided where required based on the enclosure test evaluation as
per NFPA 2001 & FSSA guide to maintain pressure within specified enclosure pressure limit.
E. Fire Control Panels:
1. FM Approved or NRTL listed.

2. 120/240 V ac.
3. Enclosure: NEMA ICS, TYPE 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
4. Mounting: As shown on drawings.
5. Separate supervised circuits for each independent hazard area.
6. Automatic switchover to standby power.
7. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
8. Service disconnect.
9. Control interface capability with Building Control System, if applicable, and Fire Alarm
System for general alarm, control panel fault and cylinder low pressure
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans, and locations of detectors
and abort, EPO, and manual stations.
G. Standby power.
H. Detection Devices:
1. NFPA 2001, NFPA 72, and UL 268.

2. 24 V dc, nominal.
3. Photoelectric detectors.

I. Manual Stations:
1. Surface or Semirecessed mounted with clear plastic hinged guard, FM approved or NRTL
listed.
2. Manual release.
3. Abort switch.
4. EPO switch.
J. Switches, FM approved or NRTL listed:
1. Low-agent pressure switches.

2. Power transfer switches.
3. Abort switches.
4. Door closers.
K. Alarm Devices, FM approved or NRTL listed:
1. Bells.
2. Horns.
3. Strobe lights.
L. Oxygen Deficiency Monitor.
1.7 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 15-MPa CHARGING PRESSURE
A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and ac-
cessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 13.8 MPa minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Black, Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and ac-
cessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 6900 kPa minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Black, Schedule 40 or 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
1.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Professional Engineer: Inspect installed clean-agent extinguishing systems, prepare installation

report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract Documents and calculations, and
comments of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing: By Contractor engaged.

SECTION 213113 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
provisions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, drivers,

controllers, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with
requirements indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units through one source
with responsibility and accountability to respond to and resolve problems regarding compatibility,
installation, performance, and acceptance of units.
D. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
E. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose threads, and
installation.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of the electric-drive, centrifugal fire pumps that fail in materials or workman-
ship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa.
B. Quality Standards: NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.
C. Seismic Performance: Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7, and SBC 201.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 213113

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.5 PRODUCTS
A. Horizontally Mounted, Multistage, Split-Case Fire Pumps:
2. Number of Stages: Two.
3. Casing: Axially split case, cast iron.
4. Impeller: Cast bronze.
5. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.
6. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
7. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast iron housing.
8. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn and
bronze packing gland.
9. Mounting: Pump and driver on same base, with horizontal shafts.
10. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment,
with metal guard.
11. Inlet Flange: ASME B16.1, Class 125 or Class 250 as required.
12. Outlet Flange: ASME B16.1, Class 125 or Class 250 as required.
13. Driver:
a. Standard: UL 1004-5.
b. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B, totally enclosed, fan
cooled, squirrel-cage, induction motor. Motor shall comply with Division 21
Section “Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment”. Include
construction complying with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70, and include wiring
compatible with controller used.
c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
unit before shipping.
14. Volts: 400 V.

15. Phase: Three.
16. Frequency 60 Hz
B. Fire Pump Controllers:
1. General: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation; factory assembled and wired;
factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
a. Enclosure: UL 50, Type 12, water proof, indoor, unless special-purpose enclosure
is indicated.
b. Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required
for drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed for each controller
type.
c. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and listings, and
other pertinent data.
d. Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20 with
nonferrous-metal sensing piping, DN15, with globe valves for testing controller
mechanism from system to pump controller as indicated. Include bronze check
valve with 2.4-mm orifice in clapper or ground-face union with noncorrosive
diaphragm having 2.4-mm orifice.
2. Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-pump service.
3. Motor Starting: Reduced-voltage soft starter or auto transformer type as per manufacturer’s
recommendation, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings.

4. Surge arresters in compliance with IEEE C62.1 or IEEE C62.11 and shall be installed in
common mode to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and earth. As an alternative,
the controller shall withstand without any damage 10 kV impulse in accordance with IEEE
C62.41 or ANSI/UL 1449.
5. Pressure-switch actuated control.
a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high- and

low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression piping.
b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
6. Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the motor
RUN contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.
7. Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.
8. Rate controllers for scheduled horsepower. Include short-circuit withstand rating at least
equal to short-circuit current available at controller location. Take into account cable size
and distance from substation or supply transformers.
9. Interlocked isolating switch and MCCB (Molded-case circuit breaker); with a common,
externally mounted operating handle, and providing locked-rotor protection, complying
with NFPA 20 requirements.
10. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls: Monitor, display, and control the devices,
alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller
types used
a. Include audible alarm, with silence push button.

b. Include nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
11. Automatic Transfer Switches:
a. Complies with NFPA 20, UL 218, UL 1008 and FM approved.

b. Integral with controller as a listed combination fire-pump controller and power
transfer switch and shall be housed in a barriered compartment of the fire pump
controller or in a separate enclosure attached to the controller and marked “Fire
Pump Power Transfer Switch”.
c. Automatically transfers fire-pump controller from normal power supply to alternate
power supply in event of power failure and retransfers to normal power supply upon
return of power supply with a time delay till the normal source is stabilized, unless
the alternate source fails.
d. Electrically operated and mechanically held.
e. Allows manual transfer from one source to the other.
f. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:
1) Normal source available.

2) Alternate source available.
3) In normal position.
4) In alternate position.
5) Isolating means open.
g. Audible alarm, with silence push button.

h. Nonautomatic (manual, nonelectric) means of transfer.
i. Engine test push button.
j. Start generator output contacts.
k. Timer for weekly generator tests.
C. Fire-Pump Accessories and Specialties:
1. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating,
and complying with NFPA-20 requirements.
2. Automatic air-release valves complying with NFPA 20 for installation.
3. Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, Brass.

4. Relief Valves: UL 1478, Bronze or cast iron.

5. Suction and discharge gages
6. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer.
7. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer.
8. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.
D. Alarm Panels: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching controller type
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type with manufacturer's standard
red paint.
2. Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:
a. Motor-operating condition.
b. Loss-of-line power.
c. Phase reversal.
E. Flowmeter Systems: UL listed or FM Approved able to indicate flow to not less than 175 percent
of fire-pump rated capacity.

2. Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi.
3. Permanently mounted, compatible with flow sensor.
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Testing: Hydraulically test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for
"Operation Test" and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."
1. Test at 150 percent of shutoff head plus suction head, but not less than 1725 kPa. Produce
certified test curves and inspection reports showing head capacity and brake horsepower of
each pump.
2. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.

SECTION 213116 - DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
provisions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, drivers,

controllers, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with
E. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose threads, and
installation.
F. Quality Standards: NFPA 20, NFPA 30, and UL 448.
1.3 WARRANTY

replace components of the diesel-drive, centrifugal fire pumps that fail in materials or workman-
ship within specified warranty period.
A. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa.
B. Seismic Performance: Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 213116

C. Fire-Pump Systems: Fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units that comply with

performance requirements specified and are compatible with building fire-suppression systems.
D. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: (1200 kPa) minimum unless higher
pressure rating is indicated.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.5 PRODUCTS
A. Single-Stage, Split-Case Fire Pumps:
1. Standard: UL 448, factory-assembled and –tested as a one package in country of origin (UL
listed & FM approval).
3. Impeller: Double suction, cast bronze.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Alloy-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
6. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
with metal guard.
B. Multistage, Split-Case Fire Pumps:
1. Standard: UL 448, factory-assembled and –tested as a one package in country of origin (UL
listed & FM approval).
2. Number of Stages: Two.
4. Impeller: Double-suction, cast bronze.
6. Shaft and Sleeve: Alloy-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
7. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
with metal guard.
C. Diesel Engine:
1. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

2. Horse Power Rating: Not less than 110 percent of maximum brake horsepower (after
derating for temperature and elevation according to NFPA 20).
3. Emergency manual operator.
4. Controls:

a. Adjustable governor.
b. Over-speed shutdown.
c. Manual reset, speed switch.
d. Instrument panel with tachometer, oil pressure gage, water temperature gage, and
hour meter.
5. Fuel System:
a. Comply with NFPA 20.

b. Main fuel pump.
c. Relief-bypass valve.
d. Flexible metallic fuel lines.
e. Inline fuel filter.
f. Oil pressure safety switch.
g. Air cleaner.
h. Engine-driven oil pump.
i. Double-wall storage tank as per NFPA 20, and secondary containment tank.
6. Exhaust System:
a. Piping: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Schedule 40 black steel pipe,

ASME B16.9 weld-type pipe fittings, ASME B16.5 steel flanges, and
ASME B16.21 nonmetallic gaskets.
b. Double-wall, ventilated thimble.
c. Flexible exhaust connector.
d. Industrial exhaust silencer with spark arrestor.
7. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 RPM.

8. Maximum Pistion Speed for Four –Cycle Engines: 11.4 m/s.
9. Engine- or skid-mounted lubrication system.
10. Immersion-type electric coolant jacket heater.
11. Cooling System: Integral or Remote.
a. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold
start to 110 percent load condition.
12. Muffler/Silencer. Industrial.

13. Air-Intake Filter: Standard duty.
14. Starting System: 12 or 24-V dc, with negative ground.
D. Fire Pump Controllers:
1. General: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation; factory assembled and wired;
factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
a. Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed

locations and NFPA 20.
1) Indoor Locations Subject to Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 2

(IEC IP11)
b. Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required

for drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed for each controller
type.
c. Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and listings, and
other pertinent data.
d. Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20 with
nonferrous-metal sensing piping, DN15, with globe valves for testing controller
mechanism from system to pump controller as indicated. Include bronze check

valve with 2.4-mm orifice in clapper or ground-face union with noncorrosive

diaphragm having 2.4-mm orifice.
2. Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for diesel-drive, fire-pump service.
3. Pressure-switch actuated control.
a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high- and

low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression piping.
b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.
4. Dual, redundant dc-voltage battery units, with automatic changeover.

5. Emergency Control: Bypasses all automatic control circuits during manual starting and
running.
6. Automatic engine start on loss of ac power to the controller.
7. Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.
8. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls: Monitor, display, and control the devices,
alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller
types used
a. Include audible alarm, with silence push button.

b. Include nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.
E. Fire-Pump Accessories and Specialties:
1. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating,
and complying with NFPA-20 requirements.
2. Automatic air-release valves complying with NFPA 20 for installation.
3. Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, Brass.
4. Relief Valves: UL 1478, Bronze or cast iron.
5. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer.
6. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer.
7. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.
8. Hose Valve Manifold:
a. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.

b. Header Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, with ends threaded
according to ASME B1.20.1.
c. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.
d. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.
e. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron or Exposed type, brass, with number of
outlets required by NFPA 20; polished brass or rough brass finish on exposed parts.
1) Test Connections: Comply with UL 405; however, provide outlets without

clappers instead of inlets.
2) Nipples for flush type: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel
pipe, with ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
3) Adapters and Caps with Chain for flush type: Brass or bronze, with outlet
threaded according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
threads.
4) Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963
and matching local fire-department threads.
F. Alarm Panels: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching controller type
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type with manufacturer's standard
red paint.
2. Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:

a. Engine running.
b. Main switch off or in manual position.
c. Engine trouble.
d. Low-water alarm.
e. Low-fuel.
G. Flowmeter Systems: UL listed or FM Approved able to indicate flow to not less than 175 percent
of fire-pump rated capacity.

2. Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi.
3. Permanently mounted, compatible with flow sensor.
1.6 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Comply with NFPA 30.
B. Day Tank: UL 142, freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral rupture basin
with capacity 150% of nominal and leak detector connected to audible and visual alarm, float-
controlled transfer pump, and low-level alarm.
C. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped complying with UL 142, with level
indicator, vandal-resistant fill cap, and containment provisions complying with requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Factory Testing: Hydraulically test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for
"Operation Test" and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."
1. Test at 150 percent of shutoff head plus suction head, but not less than 1725 kPa . Produce
certified test curves and inspection reports showing head capacity and brake horsepower of
each pump.
2. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.
B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

SECTION 213413 - PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
provisions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, drivers, con-
trollers, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with require-
ments indicated.
F. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose threads, and
installation.
G. Comply with NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection," for pressure
maintenance pumps, drivers, controllers, accessories, and installation.
1.3 WARRANTY

replace components of the pressure-maintenance pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
A. Fire-Pump Systems: Fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units that comply with perfor-
mance requirements specified and are compatible with building fire-suppression systems.
B. Controller shall comply with UL 508 factory assembled, wired, and tested across-the-line for
combined automatic and manual operation
C. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum un-
less higher pressure rating is indicated.
PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS 213413

D. Seismic Performance: Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
1.5 VERTICAL, MULTISTAGE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Factory-assembled and -tested multistage, barrel-type vertical pump as defined in HI 2.1-2.2 and
HI 2.3; for surface installation with pump and motor direct coupled and mounted vertically.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Barrel: Stainless steel.

2. Suction and Discharge Chamber: Cast iron with flanged inlet and outlet.
3. Pump Head/Motor Mount: Cast iron.
4. Impellers: Stainless steel, balanced, and keyed to shaft.
5. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
6. Seal: Mechanical type with carbon rotating face and silicon-carbide stationary seat.
7. Wear Rings: Teflon.
8. Intermediate Chamber Bearings: Aluminum-oxide ceramic or bronze.
9. Chamber-Base Bearing: Tungsten carbide.
10. O-Rings: EPDM or NBR.
C. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings and rigidly mounted to pump head.
D. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller, at least3 m long.
E. Working Pressure: 1200 kPa minimum.
1.6 CONTROLLERS FOR PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
1. Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined
automatic and manual operation.
2. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 12 for wall-mounting.
3. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.
B. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
1. Fusible disconnect switch.

2. Pressure switch.
3. Hand-off-auto selector switch.
4. Pilot light.
5. Running period timer.
1.7 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for pump capacity
rating. Include the following:

1. Circulation relief valve.

2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all NEOM’s guidelines and
C. Related Provisions:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500


(NEOM-NEV-TGD-602)
702)
56. NEOM-NEN-MAN-002_LST01_01.00 – NEOM Approved Vendor’s List
bends, or elbows which may be required for installation of various materials, equipment, piping,
and ductwork systems in allotted spaces. The Contractor shall examine these and other available
E. All work not shown on drawings in complete detail shall be installed in conformance with
accepted standard practice and manufacturer’s recommendations.
equipment and materials as may be necessary in order to accomplish this.
G. Work indicated on drawings, but not mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa, shall be
performed as if specifically mentioned or indicated by both.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project are as follows:
1. Climatic Conditions:
a. Latitude: 27°55 N
b. Longitude: 35°17 E.
c. Altitude: 15 m.
2. Rain water :
a. Design intensity: 125 mm/ hr.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Comply with the requirements of Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures”, and additional
requirements specified below and in different sections of division 22
C. Shop Drawings:
following points
conflicts.
b. Shop drawings shall identify the related contract drawing number or related
reference drawing.
d. Shop drawings shall show schedules and description of equipment, valves, piping
and fittings
movement.


m. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into
building during construction.
o. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and
inlets, light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access
panels and other ceiling-mounted items.
s. Pipe sleeves.
a. Complete floor plans with plumbing to a minimum of 1/50 scale.

b. Plumbing of mechanical rooms to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
c. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
d. Fabricated equipment to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues are not clearly
resolved, when there is a question as to whether contract documents are being complied
with or the design intent is not being met.
D. Product Data:
22.
include, but not be limited to, samples, test results and supporting documentation.
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for plumbing
products, equipment and systems, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
Plumbing”, SBC 701, the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code”, SBC 601, and the standards listed
below in this section; whichever is more stringent.

D. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
E. All Material and equipment shall be new, unless stated otherwise and approved by the employer
F. The entire plumbing system shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration
G. Manufacturer’s written directions and recommendations shall be followed. If these instructions

are different from the contract documents or referenced international standards, the more stringent
requirements shall establish the minimum standard. Any conflict shall be brought to the attention
of the engineer for clarification. Prior to the execution of the work
H. All electrical work related to Plumbing items shall be as specified under Division 26, Electrical
I. All pipes used in drinking water shall be Lead-free water pipe, solder and flex. Plastic pipes used
for drinking water shall be NSF-61 certified. In-line devices shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF
372, End point devices used to dispense drinking water must meet the requirements of NSF 61 and
NSF 372.
J. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
K. Equipment and materials to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed,
manufactured and listed or approved for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse
effects of weather prevailing at the project location. The additional protective measures against
outdoor weather required by the manufacturers’ installation instructions and prevalent practice
shall be provided.
L. Where two or more equipment or components are of the same class, the same manufacturer shall
be used for selecting the equipment; component parts of the entire system need not be products of
the same manufacturer.
M. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in
its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be
N. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a

O. Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors
P. All equipment with moving parts shall be protected against personal injury
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling, transport,

D. Protect stored pipes, tubes, flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. Elevate
above grade.
1.8 COORDINATION
construction, to allow for Plumbing installations.
admittance of all equipment before closing in building.
E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for Plumbing items requiring access for
operation, service or maintenance that are concealed behind finished surfaces whether indicated on
plans or not . Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
F. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services.
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
A. All local codes and regulations shall become part of this specification and must be adhered to
where they exceed requirements as shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications, without
the code.
number; list of each product referenced in manual; and name, address and telephone
number of installing contractor and maintenance contractor for each product.

particular installation; certified test and balance report; list of control point labels, and
wiring diagrams.
4. Full size sheets, if required, shall be folded into special holding pockets. Faxed,
handwritten, or illegible materials are not acceptable.
contents of operating and maintenance manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects
of operations and maintenance.
A. Contractors are cautioned that they must exercise extreme care in any activity involving contact
with any installed roof membrane.

1.13 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of underground service, utilities, structures, etc., which
may be encountered or be affected by his work and shall be responsible for any damage caused by
neglect to provide proper precautions or protection.
1. A minimum of 12 hours of on-site overview of the overall Plumbing System.

2. Refer to Division 22 sections for specific training on each of the components of the
Plumbing System.
1.15 WELDING
conditions.
2. Comply with the set standards in the specification.
3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping and
systems.
C. Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for fusion welding
shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify processes and
operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1 /B2.1M, and / or, as approved by the Qualifications."
welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including
welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed
to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds
with his specific code marking signifying his name and number as signed.
H. Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during or after
installation.
I. Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over
the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be re-
qualified.
J. Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and dampness during
A. Refer to Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment section,
for sound and vibration requirements.

B. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or vibration,
noticeable sound outside the room in which moving equipment are installed, or annoyingly
instructions.
1.17 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Division 01 for all components and with special warranties listed in individual
section of Division 22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
B. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
bid opening. The 5-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size however, digital electronics devices, software and systems such
as controls, instruments, Operator interface devices, shall be of the current generation of
technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record. The 5-year experience
shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the
commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
C. Products shall be supported by a local service organization, authorized and trained by the
manufacturer of the equipment supplied. System components shall be environmentally suitable
for the indicated locations.
D. Material and equipment shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a complete
inventory of repair parts and is reasonably located within the project reach
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved joining materials
not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 22 and
this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved dielectric fittings
not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 22 and
this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved mechanical sleeve
seals not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division
22 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.

C. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
D. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
E. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections.Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved flexible
connectors not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of
division 22 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 860 kPa (125-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working
pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing

covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Stainless-Steel-Hose / Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors:
Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel
nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860 kPa (125-psig) minimum working-
pressure rating at 104. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved sleeves not listed
below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 22 and this
section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved escutcheons not
listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 22 and this
B. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
F. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
G. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special and other approved grout not listed
below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 22 and this
B. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,

and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.9 SCREWS
A. Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching"
B. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or cutting.
C. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects passing through.
D. Do not pierce beams or columns without written permission from the structural engineer and then
only as directed.

3.2 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure
Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Government.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove

damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
D. Removed materials must not be reused unless otherwise specified or directed to be so.
E. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping utility services within areas of
demolition. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and
capping locations on Project Record Documents.
systems.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Size reduction shall be made using reducing fittings; bushings are not acceptable.
L. Independently support piping so that its weight shall not be supported by the equipment to which it
is connected.
M. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping,
N. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half (1/2) the diameter
of the main.
O. Cover ends of piping during installation to keep inside of piping clean.
P. Piping shall not be routed through electrical rooms or transformer vaults, or above transformers,
Q. Use only wrenches having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass specialties;
S. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors in finished spaces.
T. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
U. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
V. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
W. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

X. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Y. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Z. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

AA. Conveniently locate control panels, hardware and devices, valves, thermometers, gauges, cleanout
fittings, and other equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection,
repairs, or removal and replacement.
BB. Install thermometers and gauges to be easily read from floors, platforms, and walkways.
CC. Install piping at the required slope indicated in the specification and/or drawings
DD. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
EE. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Non-pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
indicated.
C. Install Plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

E. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts.
A. Refer to Division 22 specification section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.8 PAINTING
A. Painting of Plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections


support and anchor Plumbing materials and equipment.
3.10 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
embedded.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
Plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
3.12 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for Plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.

A. Complete all phases of work so the system, equipment, and components can be checked out,
started, calibrated, operationally tested, adjusted, balanced, functionally tested, and otherwise
Contract Documents.
equipment.
6. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive,
labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass
Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
7. Before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove
grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush
valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping
shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas.

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
B. Refer to Section 220500 “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for applicable NEOM provisions.
A. Products and materials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in Section
016000 “Product Requirements.
B. Comply with the applicable requirements and recommendations of local Saudi Building Code
as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards
C. Comply with NEMA MG1.
F. Comply with IEC 60529.
B. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 46.1 deg C and at altitude of 625 m above sea
level.
C. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous running duty
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513

D. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
E. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1 or IC
F. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to NEMA
G. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to IEC
H. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient tempera-
I. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1 or
J. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.
K. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection and
L. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding protection
M. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and bear-
N. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller suppliers to
1.5 MATERIALS

4. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque or Separate winding for each speed as applicable.
6. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
above.



thrust loading.
D. Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM):
1. Brushless, permanent magnet type, with ball bearing design.

2. Designed for synchronous rotation and able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or
vertical orientation.
3. Energy-Efficient Design: Super premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE4 to IEC
60034-30-1.
4. EC Motor Service Factor: 1.15.
5. Motor shall be resiliently mounted, self-aligning and oiled for life.
6. ECM built-in electronic drive suitable for either manual and/or DDC controlled flow
adjustments.
7. Variable speed with motor speed input compatible with the DDC analog outputs range.
8. Motor shall be completed with Thermal Overload Protector (TOP).
9. Motor to be controlled and regulated by a DC signal supplied from a field instrument, DDC
controller or BMS.

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, and
identification for expansion fittings and loops, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary
Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701 and 702, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is
more stringent.
C. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,
and temperatures.
B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Packless Expansion Joints:
1. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two
flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center
section of flexible hose.
b. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.
c. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing DN 50 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with
solder-joint end connections.
d. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing DN 65 to DN 100: Copper-alloy fittings with
e. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 50 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with
threaded end connections.
f. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 65 to DN 150: Carbon-steel fittings with
flanged end connections.
g. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 200 to DN 300: Carbon-steel fittings with
h. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 350 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516

2. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Standards: ASTM F1120.

b. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.
c. Configuration: Single joint with base and double joint with base class(es).
d. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- and two-ply phosphor-bronze bellows,
copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds.
1) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 50 and Smaller: [Solder joint] [or]
[threaded].
2) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 65 to DN 100: [Solder joint] [or]
[threaded].
3) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 125 and Larger: Flanged.
e. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel
pipe ends, and carbon-steel shroud.
1) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.

2) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 65 and Larger: [Flanged] [Welded].
f. Expansion Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,

stainless-steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
1) End Connections for Stainless-Steel Pipe: Flanged.
3. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Standards: ASTM F1123.

b. Material: Fabric-reinforced butyl rubber.
c. Spherical Type: Single and double spheres with external control rods.
d. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa at 116 deg C .
e. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalis, or Chemicals: Butyl Rubber.
f. Material for Water: Butyl Rubber.
g. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.
4. Expansion Compensators:
a. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1200-kPa (175-psig), with internal guides, antitorque

device, and removable end clip for positioning.
b. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.
c. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
d. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
e. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
B. Packed Expansion Joints:
1. Slip Expansion Joints:
a. Description: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for repacking

under pressure and with compound limit stops.
b. Minimum pressure rating: 1725 kPa at 204 deg C .
c. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.
d. Double-Slip Type: With base.
e. End Connections: flanged or weld ends to match piping system, and flanged-end
connections, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flexible Ball Joints:

a. Standard: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II,
"Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for
materials and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.
b. Description: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing,
designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection.
c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa at 204 deg C .
d. End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
e. End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
f. Joints for DN150 and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
g. Joints for DN200 and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.
C. Alignment Guides and Anchors:
1. Alignment Guides: Steel, factory fabricated.

2. Anchor Materials:
a. Steel shapes and plates: ASTM A36/A36M

b. Bolts and nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel hex head.
c. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers.
d. Wedge-type mechanical anchor fasteners.
1) Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2) Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3) Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
e. Insert-type chemical anchor fasteners.
1) Bonding Material: ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component

epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
2) Stud: ASTM A307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud.
f. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
g. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1) Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.
2) Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3) Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
sleeve seals for plumbing piping, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code –
General“, SBC 201, and “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards listed
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ductile iron, with plain ends.
plain ends.
C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, with nailing flange.
collar.
plain ends.
A. Manufactured, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral cast flashing flange, with underdeck
clamp.
sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N).

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517

1.7 GROUT
1.8 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealant, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
B. Silicone Sealant, S, P, T, NT: Single-component 25, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
system.
system.
waterstops.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
plumbing piping, and as per the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
1.4 PRODUCTS
2. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
3. Insulated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish or One-piece cast
brass with polished brass finish.
4. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with
polished, chrome-plated finish or One-piece cast brass with polished brass finish.
5. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with polished,
chrome-plated finish or One-piece cast brass with polished brass finish.
6. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated
finish or One-piece cast brass with rough-brass finish.
7. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish
One-piece cast brass with rough brass finish.
B. Floor Plates: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
016000 “Product Requirements.”
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification
for meters and gages, as listed in the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the standards listed
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Thermometers, General
1. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
a. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions .

b. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions .
B. Bimetallic-Actuated Thermometers:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.
2. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel; 127-mm diameter.
3. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with etched scale in deg C.
4. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle.
5. Connector Size: 13 mm, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
6. Window: Plain glass or plastic.
7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
C. Filled-System Thermometers:
1. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

a. Standard: ASME B40.200.
b. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 114-mm diameter.
c. Movement: Mechanical precision geared, brass.
d. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with etched scale in deg C.
e. Window: Glass.
f. Ring: Metal or Stainless steel.
g. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360
degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
h. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division
to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519

b. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 114-mm diameter with back or
front flange for panel mounting.
c. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with etched scale in deg C.
d. Window: Glass.
e. Ring: Metal or Stainless steel.
f. Connector Type(s): Union joint, back or bottom; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
g. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit
installation
h. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division
to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
D. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1. Metal-Case , Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
a. Standard: ASME E1-14.

b. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring
secured 230 mm long; 152-mm size.
c. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
d. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
e. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with etched scale in deg C.
f. Window: Glass or platic.
g. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a
maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
E. Insertion Dial Thermometers

1. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.
2. Dial: 25-mm diameter.
3. Case: Stainless steel.
4. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal length of
125 mm .
F. Separable Sockets
1. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
a. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
b. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
c. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm , but not less than thickness
of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
d. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
e. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
f. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
G. Thermowells:
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Brass.
3. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Stainless steel.
4. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
5. External Threads: DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
6. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm , but not less than thickness of insu-
lation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
7. Internal Threads: 13, 19, and 25 mm, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8. Heat-Transfer Medium: Oil or graphite.
H. Pressure Gages:
1. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


b. Case: Liquid-filled-case type for booster sets and pumps type(s); cast aluminum,
brass, or drawn steel; 114-mm or 152-mm diameter.
c. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
d. Pressure Connection: Brass, with DN 8 or DN 15, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
e. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with etched scale in kPa.
f. Window: Glass.
g. Ring: Metal.
h. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
i. Range: Comply with the following:
1) Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure .
2) Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
I. Gage Attachments:
1. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with DN 8 or DN 15, and porous-metal-type surge-

dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
2. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with DN 8 pipe threads.
3. Valves: Brass or stainless steel needle, with DN 8 or DN 15, pipe threads.
J. Test Plugs: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
K. Test-Plug Kits: Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and
adapter, and carrying case.
L. Sight Flow Indicators:
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless steel body, with sight glass andplastic pelton wheel
indicator.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 860 kPa.
3. Minimum Temperature Rating: 93 deg C.
M. Flowmeters:
1. Pitot-Tube Flowmeters:
a. Sensor: Insertion type; for inserting probe in piping and measuring flow directly in
liters per second.
1) Minimum Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa.

2) Minimum Temperature Rating: 121 deg C.
b. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.
2. Turbine Flowmeters:
a. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting in pipe fitting or for installing in piping and
measuring flow directly in liters per second.

b. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.
3. Venturi Flowmeters:
a. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping.


b. Indicators:
1) Scale: Liters per second.
4. In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeters:
a. Sensor: Inline type; for installing between pipe flanges and measuring flow directly
in liters per second.

b. Indicator:
1) Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.
c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 7/10 percent for liquids and 1-1/4 percent for gases.
5. Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeters:
a. Sensor: Insertion type; for installing in pipe measuring flow directly in liters per
second.

b. Indicator: Hand-held meter, either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter.
1) Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.
c. Accuracy for installation in pipe: Plus or minus 1 percent for liquids and 1.5 percent
for gases.
N. WATER METERS
1. Description: AWWA C700-03, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters or
cubic meters as required by utility.
2. Description: ANSI/AWWA C701-07, turbine type. Registers flow in liters or
cubic meters as required by utility.
3. Description: ANSI/AWWA C702-01, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in
liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
4. Description: ANSI/AWWA C703-96 (2004), UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line,
proportional, detector type; 1035-kPa working pressure; with meter on bypass. Registers
flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
a. Bypass Meter: ANSI/AWWA C702-01, compound type, bronze case; size not less
than one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
b. Bypass Meter: ANSI/AWWA C701-07, turbine type, bronze case; size not less than
one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
5. Description: ANSI/AWWA C703-96 (2004), UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line-turbine,

detector type; 1200-kPa working pressure; with strainer and with meter on bypass.
Registers flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
a. Bypass Meter: ANSI/AWWA C701-07, turbine type, bronze case; not less than
DN50 .

6. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type complying with

ANSI/AWWA C706-96 (R2005); modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage
connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.
7. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; encoder-type complying with
ANSI/AWWA C707-05; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage
connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.
a. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and quantity.
b. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and quantity.

SECTION 220523.11 - GLOBE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
for valves, as listed in the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards listed
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
A. Standards:
1. Domestic water valves intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption must
comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372,
or must be certified to be in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 (by an ANSI-accredited
third-party certification body) that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is
less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.

2. ASME B16.18 for cast copper solder-joint connections.
a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting
point below 450 deg C for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 deg C for ball
valves.
3. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

4. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.
5. ASME B16.24 for flanges on bronze valves.
6. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
7. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
8. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
a. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.
C. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator
features:
GLOBE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.11

1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 and smaller.
3. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 and larger.
E. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valves in Insulated Piping: With (50-mm) stem extensions.
H. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
I. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be provided.
1.4 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Bronze Globe Valves, Class 125:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and smaller, CWP Rating: (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
e. Stem: Silicon-bronze alloy.
f. Disc: Rubber, Bronze, or PTFE.
g. Packing: Teflon-impregnated, asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, Class 150:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and smaller, CWP Rating: (2070 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Silicon-bronze alloy.
f. Disc: Rubber, Bronze, or PTFE.
g. Packing: Teflon-impregnated, asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
1.5 IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Iron Globe Valves, Class 125:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I.

b. NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger, CWP Rating: (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Fittings: Bronze.
f. Disc and Seat: Renewable, bronze.
g. Stem: Brass alloy, outside screw and yoke.

h. Packing and Gasket: Teflon-impregnated, asbestos free, with cast-iron follower.

i. Operator: Handwheel or chainwheel.
1.6 CHAINWHEELS
A. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, chain guides, chain, and attachment
brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to handwheels.
1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for
valve. Include zinc or epoxy coating.
2. Chain: Hot-dip-galvanized steel, Brass or Stainless steel, of size required to fit sprocket
rim.
1.7 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe (DN 65) and Smaller:
1. Bronze globe valve, Class 125, bronze / rubber / PTFE disc with threaded or solder ends.
B. Pipe (DN 80) and Larger:
1. Iron globe valve, Class 125, with flanged or grooved ends.

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
for valves, as listed in the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards listed be-
low in this section; whichever is more stringent.
A. Standards:
1. Domestic water valves intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption must
comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372,
or must be certified to be in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 (by an ANSI-accredited
third-party certification body) that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is
less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
B. ASME Compliance:

2. ASME B16.18 for cast copper solder-joint connections.
3. ASME B16.22 for wrought copper and copper alloy solder-joint connections.
4. ASME B16.34 for flanged and threaded end connections
a. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water[, sanitary waste, and storm drainage]
piping valves unless referenced.
C. Provide bronze valves made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures
and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuator Type:
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves DN 200 and larger.

2. Hand Lever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than DN 150.
G. Valves in Insulated Piping:
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12

1. Provide 50-mm extended neck stems.

2. Extended operating handles with nonthermal-conductive covering material and protective
sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.
3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
1.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered
Ends:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110; MSS SP-145.

2. CWP Rating: 4140 kPa.
3. Body Design: Two piece, blowout proof.
4. Body and Bonnet Material: ASTM B584 Bronze.
5. Ends: Threaded or soldered.
6. Seats: PTFE.
7. Stem: Bronze or brass.
8. Ball: Chrome plated brass.
9. Port: Full.
10. Operator: Steel handwheel.
11. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
12. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
13. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two Piece with Regular Port and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded Ends:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110; MSS SP-145.

2. CWP Rating: 4140 kPa.
3. Body Design: Two piece.
4. Body and Bonnet Material: Bronze.
5. Ends: Threaded or soldered.
6. Seats: PTFE.
7. Stem: Bronze or brass.
8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
9. Port: Regular.
10. Operator: Steel handwheel.
11. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
12. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
13. Operator: Lever operators with lock
1.5 CPVC BALL VALVES
A. CPVC Union Ball Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-122.

2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: [860 kPa] [1035 kPa] <Insert value> at [23 deg C]
<Insert temperature>.
3. Body Material: CPVC.
4. Body Design: Union type.
5. End Connections for Valves DN 50 and Smaller: Detachable, socket or threaded.
6. End Connections for Valves DN 65 to DN 100: Detachable, socket or threaded.
7. Ball: CPVC; full port.
8. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
9. Handle: Tee shaped.

1.6 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE - 1035 kPa OR LESS
A. Pipe DN 50 and Smaller:

1. Bronze ball valves, two piece with full or regular port, and bronze or brass trim, and 4140-
kPa minimum WOG pressure rating.
1.7 HIGH-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE - 1035 TO 1380 kPa
1. Bronze ball valves, two piece with full or regular port, and bronze or brass trim, and 4140-
kPa minimum WOG pressure rating.
1. Bronze ball valves, two piece with regular port, and bronze or brass trim. Provide with
threaded or solder-joint ends, with stem extension.
B. Pipe DN 20 and Larger:
1. Bronze ball valves, two piece with full port, and bronze or brass trim. Provide with
threaded or solder-joint ends, with stem extension.
C. CPVC Pipe DN 80 and Smaller: Union ball valve.

SECTION 220523.13 - BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
for valves, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the
1.3 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
A. Standards:
1. Domestic water piping specialties intended to convey or dispense water for human
consumption must comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and
NSF 61 and NSF 372, or must be certified to be in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372
(by an ANSI-accredited third-party certification body) that the weighted average lead
content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
B. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.
C. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed underground or above
ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm fusion (300 micron)
bonded epoxy coating.
D. ASME Compliance:

2. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.
4. ASME B31.9 for building services valves.
a. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced
E. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.13

F. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
G. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator
features:

H. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures
and temperatures.
I. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Gear Actuator: For valves DN 200 and larger.

2. Hand lever: For valves DN 150 and smaller.
3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to gear, handlever, or stem; of size and with chain for
mounting height, according to "Installation of Valves" Article.
K. Valves in Insulated Piping: Provide 50-mm extended neck stems.
1.5 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Iron, Butterfly Valves with Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
1. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

2. CWP Rating: 1035 kPa maximum pressure differential, 1380 kPa CWP.
3. Body Design: Extended neck, field-replaceable sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style.
4. Body and Bonnet Material: ASTM A126, cast iron.
5. Seat: EPDM or NBR.
6. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
7. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
8. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle.
9. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle with memory stop.
10. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150 : Lever handle with latch lock.
11. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator.
12. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator and chain
wheel.
13. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor: Chain-wheel
operator.
B. Iron, Butterfly Valves with Ductile-Iron Disc:
1. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

2. CWP Rating: 1035 kPa maximum pressure differential, 1380 kPa CWP.
3. Body Design: Extended neck, field-replaceable sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style.
4. Body and Bonnet Material: ASTM A126, cast iron.
5. Seat: EPDM or NBR.
6. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
7. Disc: Nickel-plated [ or –Epoxy-coated or Elastomer-coated] ductile iron.
a. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle.

b. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle with memory stop.
c. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Lever handle with latch lock.
d. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator.

e. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator and
chain wheel.
8. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor: Chain-wheel
operator.
1.6 STAINLESS STEEL, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.
B. CWP Rating, DN 200 and Smaller: 2070 kPa.
C. CWP Rating, DN 250 and Larger: 1380 kPa.
D. Body Material: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A743/A743M.
E. Stem: Type 416 stainless steel.
F. Disc: Type 316 stainless steel or ductile iron, encapsulated with Grade "EN" EPDM.
G. Seal: EDPM.
1.7 CPVC BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 860 kPa at 23 deg C.
B. Body Material: CPVC.
C. Body Design: Lug or flangeless (wafer) type.
D. Seat: EPDM rubber.
E. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings.
F. Disc: CPVC.
G. Stem: Stainless steel.
H. Handle: Lever.
1.8 CHAINWHEELS
brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to handwheels.
2. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, Brass, or Stainless steel, of size required to fit sprocket
rim.
A. Pipe DN 65 and Larger:

1. Iron, Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM or NBR seat, and aluminum-bronze,or elastomer-
coated or nickel plated ductile-iron disc.
2. Stainless Steel Pipe: Stainless steel, grooved-end butterfly valve.
B. CPVC Pipe DN 80 and Larger: CPVC butterfly valve.

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
for valves, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the
A. Standards:
1. Domestic water piping check valves intended to convey or dispense water for human
consumption are to comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and
NSF 61/NSF 372, or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an American
National Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body that the
weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
stems.
C. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground or above
ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm fusion bonded epoxy
coating.
D. ASME Compliance:

3. ASME B16.5 for flanges for metric standard piping.
5. ASME B16.18 for cast-copper solder joint.
6. ASME B16.22 for wrought copper solder joint.
7. ASME B16.51 for press joint.
E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for groove-end connections.
F. Provide bronze valves made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are unacceptable.
CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.14

G. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures
and temperatures.
H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
J. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.
1.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80.

b. CWP Rating: (1380 kPa).
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Shape: Y pattern.
e. Body and Cap Material: ASTM B62, cast-bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
g. Disc: Rotating bronze with rubber seat or composition seat.
B. Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 150:
1. Description:

d. Shape: Y pattern.
e. Body and cap Material: ASTM B62, bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded or soldered.
g. Disc: Rotating bronze with rubber seat or composition seat.
1.5 IRON, SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Iron, Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:
1. Description:

d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted cap.
e. Ends: Flange or grooved.
f. Disc: Bronze, weighted non-slam.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
1.6 IRON, WAFER, SPRING-LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Iron, Wafer, Check Valves with Metal Seat, Class 125:
1. Description:

a. CWP Rating: (1380 kPa).

b. Body Material: ASTM A126, cast-iron.
c. Style: Wafer.
d. Disc and Plate: Bronze, non-slam.
e. Seal: Buna N installed between flanges.
f. Pins and springs: stainless steel.
A. Pipe (DN 565 and Smaller:
1. Bronze, swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125 or Class 150 as required, with
soldered or threaded end connections.
B. Pipe (DN 80) and Larger:
1. Iron, swing check valves with closure control lever and weight, Class 125, with grooved or
flange end connections.
2. Iron, center-guided check valves with compact wafer, Class 125 or Class 300 as required.

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
for valves, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the
A. Standards:
1. Domestic water piping check valves intended to convey or dispense water for human
consumption are to comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and
NSF 61/NSF 372, or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an American
National Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body that the
weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
stems.
C. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground or above
ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm fusion bonded epoxy
coating.
D. ASME Compliance:

3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on metric standard piping.
5. ASME B16.18 for cast-copper solder joint.
6. ASME B16.22 for wrought copper solder joint.
7. ASME B16.51 for press joint.
E. AWWA Compliance: AWWA C606 for groove-end connections.
F. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator
features:
GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.15


G. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
H. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures
and temperatures.
I. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 50-mm stem extensions.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
1.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Bronze Gate Valves, RS, Class 125:

1. Description:

b. DN 65 and smaller, CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B62 Bronze body and bonnet with integral seat and screw-in
bonnet.
e. Stem: Rising, copper silicon alloy.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free, Teflon impregnated with bronze packing unit.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, or aluminum.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, NRS, Class 150:

1. Description:

b. DN 65 and smaller, CWP Rating: 2070 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B62 Bronze body and bonnet with integral seat and union-
ring bonnet.
e. Stem: Rising copper silicon alloy.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free, Teflon impregnated with bronze packing.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, or aluminum.
1.5 IRON GATE VALVES
A. Iron Gate Valves, NRS, Class 150:

1. Description:

b. DN 80 and larger, CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM A126, cast-iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flange.
e. Stem: Rising, Brass alloy.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Disc: Solid cast-iron wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free, Teflon impregnated packing with 2 piece
packing gland assembly. Bronze packing nut.
i. Handwheel: Cast-iron.
1.6 CHAINWHEELS
brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to hand wheels.
2. Chain: Hot-dip galvanized steel, Brass, or Stainless steel, of size required to fit sprocket
rim.
1. Bronze gate valves, RS, Class 125 or Class 150 as required with soldered or threaded ends.
B. Pipe DN 80 and Larger: Cast-Iron gate valves, RS, Class 125 with flange ends.

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Comply with the requirements as specified in the applicable NEOM provisions for sustainable
design.
B. Comply with the requirements as specified in Section 0181134.14 “Sustainability Design

Requirements.”
A. Pipe hangers and equipment supports designed by Contractor.
B. Seismic-restraint hangers and supports designed by Contractor and approval obtained from
Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a professional engineer for trapeze pipe hangers, metal
framing system, pipe stands, and equipment supports.
(SBC) for materials, tests, and installation, as listed in the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC
701, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. Metal Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

b. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-
galvanized.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529

c. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.

d. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
e. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel with
same coating as Hangers or stainless steel.
2. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

b. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
c. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
3. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:
a. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-

fabricated components.
b. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel
or stainless steel.
B. Trapeze pipe hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly,
made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts,
saddles, and U-bolts..
C. Metal Framing Systems: MFMA manufacturer.
1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
D. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.
1. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-
psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
2. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength.
E. Fastener Systems: Powder-actuated fasteners and mechanical-expansion anchors.
F. Pipe Stands: Compact; Low type, single pipe; High type, single pipe; High type, multiple pipes;
Curb-mounted type; as applicable.
G. Pipe-positioning systems: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system.
H. Equipment supports: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-
carbon-steel shapes.
1.7 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink


1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for vibration and seismic controls, as listed in, but
not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code-General”, SBC 201, “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501,
and “Saudi Fire Code” SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic re-

straints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equip-
ment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article below. In-
clude the following:
assembled components or on calculations.
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
1. Applicable Wind-Restraint Loading Reference: Comply with SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7-
10.

PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548

5. .
Ss=0.55g.
S1 =0.13g.
1.4 COMPONENTS
properties.
a. Sandwich Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

2. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: Molded, oil- and water-resistant rubber,

neoprene, or other elastomeric material.
4. Open-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, with not less than 80 percent of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load.
a. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
b. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6 mm
thick elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
5. Housed-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, in two-part telescoping housing.
a. Steel housing base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator
pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
6. Restrained-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators with

vertical-limit stop restraint.
7. Housed-Restrained-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with

vertical-limit stop restraint in two-part telescoping housing.

8. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
9. Pipe-Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor of two steel tubes
separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.
a. Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops.

b. Maximum Load Per Support: 3.45 MPa on isolation material providing equal
isolation in all directions.
10. Resilient pipe guides: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.
12. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hangers with spring and
insert in compression and with vertical-limit stop.
a. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
bushings.
a. Post-installed Concrete Anchor Bolts: Secure to concrete surface with post-installed

concrete anchors. Anchors to be seismically prequalified in accordance with
ACI 355.2 testing and designated in accordance with ACI 318-14 Ch. 17 for 2015
or 2018 IBC. Preset concrete inserts: Seismically prequalified in accordance with
ICC-ES AC446 testing.
b. Anchors in Masonry: Design in accordance with TMS 402.
c. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
d. Resilient Cushion: Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4 inch (6
mm) thick.
2. Restraint Channel Bracings: Shop- or field-fabricated bracing assemblies made of

ANSI/AISI S110-07-S1 slotted steel channels, ANSI/ASTM A53/A53M steel pipe as per
NFPA 13, or other rigid steel brace member.
3. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Non-metallic
stiffeners are unacceptable.
4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
5. Anchor Bolts: Mechanical or Adhesive type, seismic rated, tested according to
ASTM E488/E488M.
6. Post-installed concrete anchors must comply with all requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-10
Ch. 13.
a. Prequalify post-installed anchors in concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 or other

approved qualification testing procedures.

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, identification for
domestic water distribution of plumbing systems piping and equipment, as listed in, but not
limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701 and 702, and the standards listed below
in this section; whichever is more stringent. Color coding of identification labels to follow SBC,
local authorities having jurisdiction, or as per ASME as specified below.
C. Quality Standard for Piping Identification: ASME A13.1.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Equipment Labels: Brass,0.8 mm stainless steel, 0.64 mm aluminum, 0.8 mm or anodized

aluminum, 0.8 mm, minimum thickness, with fasteners.
B. Plastic Warning Signs and Labels: Warning signs and labels to comply with requirements of the
local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) pertaining to the type of warning label. In absence of
AHJ requirements, the specifications in the below subparagraphs are to be followed.
1. ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock;

Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated, 3-mm thick unless otherwise indicated, with predrilled holes for
attachment hardware with fasteners.
C. Warning Tape: Warning tape to comply with requirements of the local authorities having
jurisdiction (AHJ) pertaining to the type of warning label. In absence of AHJ requirements, the
specifications in the below subparagraphs are to be followed.
1. Vinyl tape with waterproof adhesive backing suitable for indoor or outdoor use, 40 mm on
pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for larger pipes.
D. Pipe Labels: Pretensioned.
E. Stencils: Brass.
F. Valve Tags: Polished brass or aluminum, 0.8 mm minimum thickness, with predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware of brass wire, link chain, beaded chain, or S-hook fasteners.
1. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number,
piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553

space), normal operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
a. Include valve-tag schedule in operation and maintenance data.
2. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
a. Frame: Extruded aluminum.

b. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-
thickness glass.
G. Warning Tags: Warning tape to comply with requirements of the local authorities having
jurisdiction (AHJ) pertaining to the type of warning label. In absence of AHJ requirements, the
specifications in the below subparagraphs are to be followed.
1. 85 by 145 mm; brass grommet and wire fasteners.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553

SECTION 220593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: Conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies
and procedures plan, to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: AABC, NEBB, or TABB certified.
1.4 SUMMARY
A. TAB for the following:
1. Domestic water system.

2. Plumbing Equipment:
a. Domestic water booster pumps.

b. Domestic hot-water in-line circulation pumps.
c. General-duty air compressors.
d. Sanitary sewage pumps.
e. Drainage pumps.
1.5 EXECUTION
A. Tolerances:
1. Domestic Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than 0.63 L/s,
within 10 percent.
2. Compressed-Air Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent Insert value. If design value is less
than 0.63 L/s, within 10 percent.
B. Inspections:
1. Random checks by TAB specialist's test and balance engineer in the presence of Employer
to verify final TAB report.
2. Employer to randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking to be limited to the lesser of either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal eight-hour business day.
C. Additional Tests:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING 220593

1. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced
conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING 220593

SECTION 220716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
equipment insulation, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC
701, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread index of 25, and smoke-developed index of 50 for

insulation installed indoors and 75, and smoke-developed index of 150 for insulation installed
outdoors, according to ASTM E 84, UL 723, or NFPA 225.
D. Mockup of each type of equipment insulation and finish
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come into contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less than
50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable in accordance
with ASTM C795.
D. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge or expanded-rubber materials; suitable for maximum

use temperature between minus 57 deg C and 104 deg C. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M,
Type II for sheet materials.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use
temperature up to 232 deg C in accordance with ASTM C411). Comply with ASTM C553,
Type II, and ASTM C1290, Type I, unfaced..
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 220716

G. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure.

Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
1.5 ADHESIVES
A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive. Comply with MIL-A-
24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Flame-spread index is 25 or less and smoke-developed index is 50 or less as tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Wet Flash Point: Below minus 18 deg C
3. Service Temperature Range: 4 to plus 93 deg C.
C. Mineral-Fiber and Mineral Wool Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.6 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure B, 0.009 metric perm
at 1.09-mm dry film thickness.
2. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM F1249, 0.03 metric perm at 0.9-mm dry
film thickness.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient
services.
film thickness.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.2 metric perms at 1.6-mm dry film thickness.
1.7 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and be compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.

1.8 SEALANTS
A. Materials are as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and are compatible with insulation
1.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim, flame-retardant, all purpose, with

kraft-paper backing.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,
Temper H-14.
A. Field Inspections: By Contractor-engaged agency.
1.11 INDOOR EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot-Water Pump Insulation: mineral wool blanket.
B. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: flexible elastomeric, closed-cell phenolic foam, or
mineral wool blanket.
C. Piping System Filter-Housing Insulation: mineral wool blanket.
1.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Equipment, Concealed: Aluminum.
B. Equipment, Exposed, up to 1200 mm in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces of up to 1800 mm:

Aluminum.
C. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 1200 mm in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 1800
mm Aluminum.
1.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Equipment, Concealed: Aluminum.
B. Equipment, Exposed, up to 1200 mm in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces of up to 1800 mm:

Aluminum.
C. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 1200 mm in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 1800
mm: Aluminum.

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
piping insulation, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701,
and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics for insulation and related materials, noncombustible, as defined

by NFPA 220 and tested according to ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 225:
1.
2. All Insulation Installed Indoors and Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
B. Mockup of each type of pipe insulation and finish.
C. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
design.

Requirements.”
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state.
B. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less than
50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable in accordance
with ASTM C795.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719

E. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge or expanded-rubber materials; suitable for maximum

use temperature between minus 57 deg C and 104 deg C. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M,
Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for
maximum use temperature up to 454 deg C in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with
ASTM C547.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-

retarder FSK jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.6 ADHESIVES
A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.
1. Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

2. Flame-spread index is 25 or less and smoke-developed index is 50 or less as tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Wet Flash Point: Below minus 18 deg C.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
1.7 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249, Procedure B,

0.009 metric perm at 1.09-mm dry film thickness.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient
services.
film thickness.
D. Vapor-Barrier+- Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient
services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM F1249, 0.033 metric perm at (0.8-mm) dry
film thickness.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F1249, 1.2 metric perms at (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.
1.8 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Adhesives comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and are compatible with insulation
A. Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Laminated, Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim, flame-retardant all

purpose, with kraft-paper backing.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003, Temper H-14.
2. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick.
D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 3.2-mm- thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane,
consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim
and laminated aluminum foil.
1.10 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
1.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
1.13 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber; except for pipe drops to fixtures within walls, use flex-
ible elastomeric.
2. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where exposed to
view or in mechanical rooms.

3. Vapor Retarder Required: No.

4. Finish: None.
B. Service: Domestic cold water.
1. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.

2. Field-Applied Jacket: None where concealed; aluminum jacket where exposed to view or
in mechanical rooms.
4. Finish: None.
C. Service: Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater piping directly under roof slab.

2. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
4. Finish: None.
D. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the
disabled.

2. Field-Applied Jacket: SS 316, Smooth 2B Finish.
3. Finish: None.
E. Service: Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within (3 m) of Drain Receiving
Condensate and Equipment Drain Water Below (16 Deg C).

4. Finish: None.
1.14 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.
B. Service: Domestic water.

2. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
4. Finish: None.
1.15 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over
insulation material.

SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
A. Plumbing Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform plumbing Construction

Checklist verification tests. Construction Checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and
Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of plumbing system, electrical
concepts, and building operations.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured
by approved manufacturer.
B. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:
1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.
2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags
permanently affixed to the instrument being used.
3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on
Project.
4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.
1.3 Cx PROCESS
A. Perform Cx process in accordance with Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" .
1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST
A. Preliminary detailed construction checklists prepared under Section 019113 "General

Commissioning Requirements" for each plumbing system, assembly, subsystem, equipment, and
component required to be commissioned, as detailed in ASHRAE 202, IgCC. or IAPMO's "Green
Plumbing and Mechanical Code Supplement."
B. Systems Required to Be Commissioned under IgCC:
1. Domestic hot-water systems and controls.

2. Water-pumping and -mixing systems over 4 kW and purification systems.
3. Irrigation system performance that uses more than 4000 L per day.
4. Renewable energy systems and energy storage systems.
C. Additional Systems Required to Be Commissioned:
1. Domestic water piping, including the following:
a. Domestic cold- and hot-water piping, fittings, and specialties inside the building.
b. Pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800

c. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

d. Indoor water-storage tanks.
e. Meters and gauges.
f. General-duty and specialty valves.
g. Hangers and supports.
h. Heat tracing.
i. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
2. Sanitary waste and vent piping, including the following:
a. Gravity and forced-main sewerage piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Sanitary waste interceptors.
c. Pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.
d. Drains.
e. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
f. Meters and gauges.
g. General-duty and specialty valves.
h. Hangers and supports.
i. Heat tracing.
j. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
3. Storm-water piping, including the following:
a. Drainage piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.
c. Drains and collection basins.
d. Rainwater-collection and storage equipment.
e. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
f. Meters and gauges.
g. General-duty and specialty valves.
h. Hangers and supports.
i. Heat tracing.
j. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
4. Plumbing fixtures, including the following:
a. Water closets, supports and connections, supplies, and flush valves.

b. Urinals, supports and connections, supplies, and flush valves.
c. Lavatories, supports, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.
d. Sinks, supports, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.
e. Tubs, drain connections, and faucets.
f. Showers, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.
g. Wash fountains, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.
h. Emergency plumbing fixtures, supplies, drain connections, and controls.
i. Drinking fountains, supplies, and drainage connections.
5. General-service compressed-air piping, including the following:
a. Piping, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

b. Compressors, motors, accessories, and controls.
c. Compressed-air outlets and connections.
d. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
e. Meters and gauges.
f. General-duty and specialty valves.
g. Hangers and supports.
h. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
domestic water distribution piping, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
D. Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1
through 9 for potable-water piping and components.
E. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on piping.
A. Comply with the requirements as specified in Section 0181134.14 “Sustainability Design

Requirements.”
B. Comply with the requirements as specified in the applicable NEOM provisions for sustainable
design.
1.4 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe:
1. ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40.

2. Include ends matching joining method.
B. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, with threads
according to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Furnish Class 250 fittings if required to match piping..
C. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe:
1. ASTM Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Galvanized, ASTM A47/A47M,

malleable-iron casting; ASTM A106/A106M, steel pipe; or ASTM A536, ductile-iron
casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
2. AWWA Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe:
a. AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116

1.5 POLYPROPYLENE (PP-R) PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Polypropylene Pipe: ASTM F2389, pipe pressure rating to comply with temperature and pressure
ratings of code requirements for the applicable service.
1. Polypropylene Fittings: ASTM F2389, socket fusion, butt fusion, electrofusion, or fusion
outlet fittings to be used for fusion-welded joints between pipe and fittings.
2. Mechanical fittings and transition fittings to be used where transitions are made to other
piping materials or to valves and appurtenances.
3. Polypropylene pipe is to be unthreaded. Threaded transition fittings per ASTM F2389 to be
used where a threaded connection is required.
B. Smoke and Fire Ratings:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings that a plenum-rated piping system is required, the pipe is
to be wrapped and/or insulated with fiberglass or mineral wool pipe insulation, and field
installed.
2. The system is to have a flame spread classification of less than 25 and smoke development
rating of less than 50.
3. Pipe, wrap, or insulation as a system to meet the requirements of ASTM E84, or UL 2846.
4. For insulation required for thermal and condensation reasons, see Section 220719
"Plumbing Piping Insulation."
C. PP-R Socket Fittings: ASTM F2389.
1.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: ANSI/AWWA C606-06 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
1.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1.8 ABOVEGROUND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. General:
1. Polypropylene (PP-R); socket fusion, fusion outlet, or electrofusion fittings and joints.
B. Inside pump rooms: Use the following:
1. DN50 : Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded fittings.

2. DN65 to DN300 : Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; galvanized steel, grooved-end
fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
domestic water distribution piping, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
C. Quality Standards: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Domestic water piping specialties intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption
are to comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372,
or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 by an American National Standards
Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body that the weighted average lead content at
wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 860 kPa unless otherwise
indicated.
1.5 PRODUCTS
A. Vacuum Breakers:
1. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers ASSE 1001: Chrome-plated finish.

2. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011 Chrome- or nickel-plated finish.
3. Pressure vacuum breakers, ASSE 1020.
4. Spill-resistant vacuum breakers, ASSE 1056.
B. Backflow Preventers:
1. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:
a. Standard: ASSE 1012.

b. End Connections: Solder joint.
c. Finish: Chrome plated.
2. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119


b. Body: Bronze for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for DN 65 and larger.
c. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and larger.
d. Configuration: Horizontal, straight through.
3. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

b. Body: Bronze for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for DN 65 and larger.
c. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and larger.
d. Configuration: Horizontal, straight through.
4. Beverage-dispensing-equipment backflow preventers, ASSE 1022.

5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers, ASSE 1024.
6. Carbonated-beverage-dispenser, dual-check-valve backflow preventers, ASSE 1032.
7. Hose-connection backflow preventers, ASSE 1052.
8. Backflow-preventer test kits.
C. Water Pressure-Reducing Valves:
1. Water Regulators:

b. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with
interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for DN 65
and DN 80.
c. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
d. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and DN 80.
2. Water Control Valves:
a. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 1035 kPa minimum with AWWA C550
or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control valve,
restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
b. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved,
interior epoxy coating; or stainless steel body.
c. Main Valve Body: Globe-valve design.
d. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and larger.
D. Automatic Water Shutoff Valves:
1. Shutoff Control Ball Valves and Actuators:
a. Size: DN 50 and smaller.

b. Control Valve: Two-piece, full-port brass ball valve, MSS SP-110.
c. End Connections: Threaded, female.
d. CWP Rating: 4140 kPa.
e. Valve Actuator: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.
Capable of closing valve against inlet pressure. Direct mount, fails closed.
2. Shutoff Control Butterfly Valves and Actuators:
a. Size: DN 65 to DN 100.
b. Compliance: MSS SP-67.
c. Full-port, epoxy-coated, ductile-iron lug body.
d. Face-to-Face Flange: API 609.

e. Valve Actuator: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.
Capable of closing valve against inlet pressure. Direct mount, fails closed.
3. Accessories:
a. Electrical Plug Interrupter: Plugs into standard 120 V ac wall outlet.

b. Gas Flow Interrupter: ECO connector with female spade connectors. Factory
prewired, 2.44 m.
c. Gas Interface Cable: Interface cable with male and female connectors.
d. Step-Down Transformer: 240 V ac to 24 V ac with mounting plate, 3.66-m plenum
wire to power, and 2.44-m plenum wire to sensor.
1) Liquid Level Sensors: Monitor fluid levels in addition to detecting plumbing

leaks
e. Auto Dialer: Send and receive automatic alerts when a fault condition occurs.
Standard output contacts trigger up to nine predetermined telephone number calls.
f. Cellular text notification system.
E. Balancing Valves:
1. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves: Ball valve.

2. Cast-iron calibrated balancing valves.
3. Accessories: Meter kit.
4. Memory-stop balancing valves.
5. Automatic flow control balancing valves.
F. Temperature-Actuated Water Mixing Valves:
1. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:

b. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
2. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:

b. Type: Exposed mounted or Cabinet type.
c. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
d. Finish: Chrome plated.
e. Piping: Chrome plated.
f. Cabinet: Recessed or Surface mounted.
3. Primary, Electronic, Water Mixing Valve Assemblies:

b. Type: Exposed, electronically controlled, water mixing valve.
c. Finish: Bronze.
d. Digital temperature control and monitoring module.
4. Manifold, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valve Assemblies:
a. Description: Cabinet-type or Exposed-mounted assembly.

b. Cabinet: Recessed or Surface mounted.
d. Piping: Chrome plated.

e. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Comply with ASSE 1017. Include check stops on hot-
and cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet.
f. Water Regulator(s): Comply with ASSE 1003. Include pressure gauge on inlet and
outlet.
5. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water mixing valve assemblies, ASSE 1017.

6. Individual-fixture, water tempering valves, ASSE 1016.
7. Primary water tempering valves, ASSE 1017.
G. Strainers for Domestic Water Piping:
1. Body: Bronze for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining and epoxy coating for
DN 65 and larger.
2. Connections: Threaded DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and larger.
3. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
H. Hose Bibbs, ASSE A112.18.1 for sediment faucets:
1. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field installation.

2. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
3. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
4. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
5. Wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
I. Drain Valves: Ball-valve, MSS SP-110 type, MSS SP-110.
J. Water Hammer Arresters: Metal bellows, ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
K. Air Vents: Bolted construction.
L. Water Meters: Displacement type, AWWA C700.

SECTION 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Products and equipment shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in Section
domestic water packaged booster pumps, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
C. Quality Standards for Packaged Booster Pumps: UL 508, UL 508A, UL 778, and UL 1995.
D. Drinking Water System Components: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and
relevant IEC/EN standards, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
F. Booster pumps listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to
1.3 WARRANTY

replace components of the domestic-water packaged booster pumps that fail in materials or work-
manship within specified warranty period.
1.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Multiplex, Constant-Speed Booster Pumps:
1. Pumps:
a. Type: End suction as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for end-suction, close
coupled, single stage, overhung impeller, centrifugal.
b. Casing: Radially split; bronze.
c. Impeller: Closed, ASTM B584 cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced and
keyed to shaft.
d. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve and deflector.
e. Seal: Mechanical.
f. Orientation: Mounted horizontally or vertically.
g. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300 micron fusion bonded
epoxy coating applied at the factory.
DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 221123.13

2. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged, ASME-construction, diaphragm or bladder tank made

of materials complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
3. Motors: Variable speed, with grease-lubricated or pre-greased, permanently shielded, ball-
bearings.
4. Control Logic: Solid-state system with transducers, programmable microprocessor, VFC,
and other devices in controller. Install VFC for pump motors larger than 25 hp in separate
panel; same type as motor control panel enclosure.
5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general-purpose, Class A, full-voltage, combination-
magnetic type with undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect,
and short-circuit protective device.
a. Control Voltage: 120 or 220 V ac, with integral control-power transformer.
6. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12.

7. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
8. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch for each pump in cover of control
panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
a. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one lag main
pump and to three-pump operation.
9. Pump Operation and Sequencing: pressure-sensing method.

10. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulating-frequency converter for each pump.
11. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to transfer to constant-speed operation upon
VFC failure.
12. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure gauges.

13. Lights: Running light for each pump.
14. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
15. Thermal-bleed cutoff.

16. Low-suction-pressure cutout.
17. High-discharge-pressure cutout.
18. Base: Structural steel.
DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 221123.13

SECTION 221223.11 - FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Products and material shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in Section
indoor potable water storage tanks, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
C. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label FRP, ASME-code, potable-water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, "Fiber-Reinforced
Plastic Pressure Vessels."
D. ASME Compliance for Plastic Tanks: Fabricate and stamp plastic, pressure water storage tanks to
comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X ,"Fiber-Reinforced Plastic
Pressure Vessels."
E. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water storage tanks and components. Include appropriate NSF marking.
F. Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for
potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Stainless Steel, Gravity, Nonpressure, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Horizontal or Vertical.
1. Construction: Stainless steel, horizontal or vertical nonpressure-rated tank with rectangular

sidewalls. Nonpressure rated, factory or field fabricated from minimum 3mm thick
stainless steel 316 matt finish, with nontoxic welded joints
2. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in width and depth.
3. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.
4. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:
a. Vacuum relief valve.

b. Free air vent with insect screen.
c. Thermometer.
d. Gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
FACILITY
DOCUMENT INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
CODE: 11-00013877-4800000930-DAH-DES-SPC-000001 REVISION: A Page221223.11
294 of 616
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
(SBC) for the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, identification for
sanitary waste drainage and vent piping, as listed in, but not limited for, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
D. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and instal-
lation.
E. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
F. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.

Requirements.”
design.
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures."
1.5 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. HDPE – High Density Polyethylene pipe to BS EN 1519-1 of suitable grade for above and under-
ground applications, corrosion resistant, hot water resistant, extensive resistance for chemicals and
shall have proven added components that protect the pipes from UV degradation. Fittings are to be
of the electro fusion weld sleeve coupling type for various installations. HDPE pipes and fittings
shall be from same manufacturer.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316

B. HDPE Gravity Pipes: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PE 3408 resin listed with the Plastic Pipe
Institute (PPI) as TR-4. The resin material shall meet the specifications of ASTM D3350-02, or
relevant BS/EN Standards with a minimum cell classification of PE345464C. The pipe shall con-
tain no recycled compounds except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of
the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout
and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids, or other injurious defects. Gravity
HDPE pipes and fittings shall be rated for minimum DR-26 (64 psi, 4.4 bar), or to suit systems’
operating pressure whichever is greater.
C. HDPE Pressure Pipes: Pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from a PE 3408 resin, and shall be
rated for minimum DR-11 (160 psi, 11 bar), or to suit systems’ operating pressure whichever is
greater.
D. Electro fusion HDPE Fittings: Electro fusion Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE, Cell Classification
of 345464C as determined by ASTM D3350-02, or relevant BS/EN Standards and be the same
base resin as the pipe. Electro fusion Fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM
F1055, or relevant BS/EN Standards. All fittings shall be pressure rated to provide a working pres-
sure rating no less than that of the pipe.
E. Tie-ins to other piping systems and/or equipment shall be with HDPE flange adapters and metal
back-up rings, unless otherwise specified by the engineer on the drawings. Mechanical compres-
sion or clamp style fittings are not allowed.
F. Electro-fusion sleeve welded: All joints except where expansion joints are required when there is a
need to use the manufacturer’s purpose made seal ring joint expansion fitting
G. Flanged and Mechanical Joint HDPE Adapters: Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters shall be
PE 3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as determined by ASTM D3350-02, or relevant
BS/EN Standards and be the same base resin as the pipe. Flanged and mechanical joint adapters
shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3216, or relevant BS/EN Standards. All adapters
shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe.
H. Mechanical Restraint: Mechanical restraint for HDPE may be provided by mechanical means
separate from the mechanical joint gasket sealing gland. The restrainer shall provide wide, sup-
portive contact around the full circumference of the pipe and be equal to the listed widths. Means
of restraint shall be machined serrations on the inside surface of the restrainer equal to or greater
than the listed serrations per inch and width. Loading of the restrainer shall be by a ductile iron
follower that provides even circumferential loading over the entire restrainer. Design shall be such
that restraint shall be increased with increases in line pressure.
1.6 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, Horizontal run inside the wet areas use HDPE plastic pipes, HDPE socket fittings.
B. Aboveground, Horizontal runs ceiling suspended at basement levels use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE
socket fittings
C. Aboveground, Forced main pipes use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings
D. Underground, Forced main pipes use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings
E. Underground, Horizontal runs buried under basement slab or under slabs on grade use HDPE plas-
tic pipe, HDPE socket fittings.
F. For kitchen and Laundry drainage use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings
G. For laboratory drainage and force drainage use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings
H. For emergency fixture drainage use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings

I. Vent pipes for all use HDPE plastic pipes, HDPE socket fittings.
J. For sewage Force Mains use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings.

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
identification, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and
C. Quality Standard for Plastic Piping: NSF 14.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Backwater Valves: Horizontal, cast iron, ASME A112.14.1.
B. Cleanouts: Cast iron exposed, ASME A112.36.2M.
C. Air-Admittance Valves: Fixture air-admittance valves, ASSE 1051.
D. Miscellaneous Sanitary Drainage Piping Specialties:
1. Sleeve flashing devices.

2. Stack flashing fittings.
3. Cast-iron body vent caps.
4. Expansion joints, ASME A112.6.4.
1.4 INSPECTION CHAMBERS
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 350 (ACI 350M),
and as specified in section 033000.
B. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design
mix, 28 MPa minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels
and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 4 to 8 percent and not less than 5cm drop.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319

C. Inlets: main and side inlets are to have drop of 50 to 80 mm above invert of central channel.
D. Inspection Chamber Covers:
1. Heavy duty cast iron.

2. Material: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35 gray iron
E. Drop INSPECTION CHAMBER: provide where conditions necessitate free vertical drop
exceeding 450 mm
F. Steps: for inspection chambers deeper than 1.5 meters install galvanized pipe steps or approved
equivalent material.
1.5 NEUTRALIZATION TANK
A. Plastic, Chemical-Waste, Neutralization Tanks: Corrosion-resistant plastic materials. Include re-

movable, gastight cover; interior, sidewall-dip-tube inlet; outlet; vent; and threaded or flanged,
sidewall pipe connections.
1. Material: ASTM D 1248, HDPE; or ASTM D 4101, PP.

2. Traffic Cover: Light duty, plastic, bolted.
3. Limestone: Chips or lumps, with calcium-carbonate content more than 90 percent, and 25-
to 75-mm diameter.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, as listed in,
but not limited to the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701 and702, and the standards listed
1.3 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES
A. Quality Standard for Plastic Drains: NSF 14.
1.4 DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Pattern: Floor.
3. Backwater Valve: Drain-outlet type.
4. Acid-resistant enamel.
5. Sediment bucket.
6. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
7. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Rough bronze Stainless steel.
8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
9. With funnel where required as shown.
B. Plastic Floor Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Material: ABS.
3. Outlet: Bottom or Side.
4. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
5. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Rough bronze.
6. Top Shape: Round or Square.
7. Trap Material: Plastic drainage piping.
8. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
C. Trench Drains:
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Outlet: Bottom or End.
3. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
4. Grate Finish: Painted.
SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13

5. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
1.5 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Stainless-steel channel drainage systems, ASME A112.3.1.
B. Narrow, sloped-invert, polymer-concrete channel drainage systems.
C. Wide, level-invert, polymer-concrete channel drainage systems.
D. FRP channel drainage systems.
E. HDPE or PE channel drainage systems.
F. PP channel drainage systems.
G. PVC channel drainage systems.
H. HDPE, PE, PP, or PVC channel drainage systems.
SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13

SECTION 221323 - SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
for sanitary waste interceptors, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”
SBC 701, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Cast-Iron or Steel Grease Interceptors:
1. Standard: PDI G101 and ASME A112.14.3.

2. PDI Seal: Required.
3. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
4. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Body Extension: Required.
B. Cast-Iron or Steel Oil Interceptors:
1. Hub, hubless, or threaded inlet, outlet, vent, and waste-oil outlet piping connections.
2. Cast-iron or steel shroud extension.
3. Cast-iron or steel cover.
C. Sand Interceptors: Factory-fabricated cast iron or steel.
1. Piping Connection: Hub, hubless, or threaded outlet.

2. Grate: Cast iron or steel with reinforcement.
D. Cast-Iron or Steel Lint Solids Interceptors:
1. Interior Separation Device: Baffles or Screens.

2. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
3. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Mounting: Above-floor or Inline.
SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS 221323

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
(SBC) for the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, identification for
sanitary waste drainage and vent piping, as listed in, but not limited for, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-
C. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
D. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.

Requirements.”
A. Rainfall intensity: 117 mm/hr.
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."
1.5 MATERIALS
A. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and CISPI, hubless piping couplings.
1. Couplings:
a. Couplings shall bear CISPI collective trademark.

b. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
c. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and
tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413

1.6 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. HDPE – High Density Polyethylene pipe to BS EN 1519-1 of suitable grade for above and
underground applications, corrosion resistant, hot water resistant, extensive resistance for
chemicals and shall have proven added components that protect the pipes from UV degradation.
Fittings are to be of the electro fusion weld sleeve coupling type for various installations. HDPE
pipes and fittings shall be from same manufacturer.
B. HDPE Gravity Pipes: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PE 3408 resin listed with the Plastic Pipe
Institute (PPI) as TR-4. The resin material shall meet the specifications of ASTM D3350-02, with
a minimum cell classification of PE345464C. The pipe shall contain no recycled compounds
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, voids, or other injurious defects. Gravity HDPE pipes and fittings shall
be rated for minimum DR-26 (64 psi, 4.4 bar), or to suit systems’ operating pressure whichever is
greater.
C. HDPE Pressure Pipes: Pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from a PE 3408 resin, and shall be
rated for minimum DR-11 (160 psi, 11 bar), or to suit systems’ operating pressure whichever is
greater.
D. Electro fusion HDPE Fittings: Electro fusion Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE, Cell Classification
of 345464C as determined by ASTM D3350-02, and be the same base resin as the pipe. Electro
fusion Fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM F1055,. All fittings shall be pressure
rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe.
E. Tie-ins to other piping systems and/or equipment shall be with HDPE flange adapters and metal
back-up rings, unless otherwise specified by the engineer on the drawings. Mechanical
compression or clamp style fittings are not allowed.
F. Electro-fusion sleeve welded: All joints except where expansion joints are required when there is a
need to use the manufacturer’s purpose made seal ring joint expansion fitting
G. Flanged and Mechanical Joint HDPE Adapters: Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters shall be
PE 3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as determined by ASTM D3350-02, and be the
same base resin as the pipe. Flanged and mechanical joint adapters shall have a manufacturing
standard of ASTM D3216,. All adapters shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure
rating no less than that of the pipe.
H. Mechanical Restraint: Mechanical restraint for HDPE may be provided by mechanical means
separate from the mechanical joint gasket sealing gland. The restrainer shall provide wide,
supportive contact around the full circumference of the pipe and be equal to the listed widths.
Means of restraint shall be machined serrations on the inside surface of the restrainer equal to or
greater than the listed serrations per inch and width. Loading of the restrainer shall be by a ductile
iron follower that provides even circumferential loading over the entire restrainer. Design shall be
such that restraint shall be increased with increases in line pressure.
1.7 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground exterior piping: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with heavy duty Type 304
stainless steel couplings.
B. Aboveground, Horizontal run inside the wet areas use HDPE plastic pipes, HDPE socket fittings.
C. Aboveground, Horizontal runs ceiling suspended at basement levels use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE
socket fittings
D. Aboveground, Forced main pipes use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings

E. Underground, Forced main pipes use HDPE plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings
F. Underground, Horizontal runs buried under basement slab or under slabs on grade use HDPE
plastic pipe, HDPE socket fittings.

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for storm
drainage piping specialties, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”,
C. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
D. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics
of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
F. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified
standards.
G. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. General-Purpose Roof Drains:
1. Cast-Iron Roof Drains:
a. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

b. Sump: Medium.
c. Body Material: Cast iron.
d. Dimension of Body: Medium, 203- to 305-mm diameter.
e. Dome Material: Cast iron.
f. Combination flashing ring and gravel stop.
g. Outlet: Bottom.
h. Outlet Type: No hub.
i. Options:
1) Extension collar.
2) Underdeck clamp.
3) Wire Mesh: Stainless steel or brass over dome.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423

4) Vandal-proof dome.
2. Combination Cast-Iron Roof and Overflow Drains:
a. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

b. Provide a combination roof and overflow drain with two no-hub outlets and two
dome strainers, flashing clamps, deck flange, in one integral watertight unit
designed for flat roof construction.
c. Sump: Large.
d. Body Material: Cast iron.
e. Dimension of Body: Large, 357- to 406-mm diameter.
f. Dome Material: Cast iron.
g. Combination flashing ring and gravel stop.
h. Outlet: Bottom.
i. Options:
1) Extension collar.
3. Cast-Iron Gutter Roof Drains:
a. Standard ASME A112.6.4.

b. Body Material: Cast iron.
c. Dimension of Body: Nominal 152-mm diameter.
d. Dome Material: Bronze.
e. Outlet: Bottom.
f. Outlet Type: Threaded.
g. Options:

B. Miscellaneous Storm Drainage Piping Specialties: Downspout adaptors, downspout boots, or

metal downspout nozzles.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423

SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS
for sump pumps, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing” SBC 701,
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
1.3 WARRANTY

replace components of the sump pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Submersible, Fixed-Position, Double-Seal Sump Pumps:
1. Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller,

direct-connected centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
2. Pump Casing: Cast iron.
3. Impeller: ASTM A532/A532M abrasion-resistant cast iron and ASTM B584cast bronze,
open or semiopen, nonclog design for clear wastewater handling, overhung, single suction
and keyed and secured to shaft by locking cap screw.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel.
5. Seals: Double mechanical.
6. Moisture-sensing probe.
7. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
9. Controls: Pedestal-mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons, with NEMA 250
Type 1 enclosure.
10. Controls: Wall-mounted with NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure, with three micropressure type
switches, in NEMA 250 Type 6 enclosure.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

11. High-water alarm.

12. Control-Interface Features:
a. Remote alarm contacts.

b. Building Automation System Interface:
1) On-off status of pump.

2) Alarm status.
B. Sump Pump Pits
1. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Section
"Cast-in Place Concrete."
2. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating of dimension to fit cover.
a. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.

b. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for
recessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
3. Pit Cover:
a. Material: Steel, with bituminous coating.

b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-traffic
areas.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

SECTION 223100 - DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
A. Products, material and equipment shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in
for dome -
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Ar-
ticle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
D. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where indicated.
E. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.
F. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label water softeners to comply with UL 979, "Water Treatment
Appliances."
1.2 WARRANTY

replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified war-
ranty period. Include coverage for the following:
1. Attrition loss of resin not to exceed 3 percent per year.

2. Resin not to be washed out of system during service run or backwashing period.
3. Effluent turbidity not to be greater and color not to be darker than incoming water.
4. Underdrain system, gravel, and resin not to become fouled, with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or
scale from softener equipment or soft water, while operating according to manufacturer's
written operating instructions.
5. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion
1.3 WATER SOFTENERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type water softener, NSF or WRAS compliant.
B. Configuration: Twin unit with two mineral tanks and one brine tank, factory mounted on skids.
C. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 5 to at least 49 deg C.
D. Mineral Tanks: FRP, pressure-vessel quality. Include hydrostatic test at minimum of one and one-
half times pressure rating.

2. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed level.
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223100

E. Mineral Tanks: Steel, electric welded; pressure-vessel quality. Include hydrostatic test at minimum
of one and one-half times pressure rating.

2. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed level.
3. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized on exterior and interior after fabrication, or Exterior spray-
painted with rust-resistant prime coat. Interior lined with epoxy-polyamide coating.
F. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate supports and attachments to tank to resist seismic forces.
G. Controls: Fully automatic; factory mounted on unit.
H. Main operating valves.
I. Flow control.
J. Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.
1. Tank and Cover Material: Fiberglass or molded PE.

2. Size: Large enough for at least four regenerations at full salting.
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223100

SECTION 223200 - DOMESTIC WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
A. Products, material and equipment shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in
Section 016000 “Product Requirements.
for water filtration equipment, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Sanitary Code - Plumbing”
C. Welding: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: NFPA 70.
E. Components in Contact with Potable Water: NSF 61 Annex.
F. Circulating Pumps: UL 778, HI 1.1-1.2, and HI 1.3.
1.3 WARRANTY

replace components of the domestic water treatment equipment that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.4 ULTRA-VIOLET (UV) STERILIZING UNIT:
A. Description: Unit to include 304 stainless-steel sterilizing chambers with removable head. UV
lamps to slide into high purity sleeves. Sleeves are attached to chamber head so that they may be
easily removed as a bundle for inspection or cleaning. Flow regulator on discharge line to maintain
flow to ensure an exposure dosage of 30,000 micro-watt-sec/cm². Sterilizer to include high
powered ballast, fuse, power safety switch, all inside white enamel housing with stainless-steel
cover and electrical cord. Unit shall have NEMA 3R electrical enclosure.
B. UV unit minimum pressure rating to be 850 KPa, subject to suit system operating pressure.
C. UV unit shall be completed with the following features:
1. UV intensity sensor and meter with safe/unsafe zones to indicate UV below effective
range, mounted on sterilizer housing.
2. Elapsed time meter indicating hours of run time.
3. Overheat safety controls.
DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 223200

1.5 CHLORINE DIOXIDE GENERATION AND DOSING SYSTEM
A. Description: Chlorine dioxide generators and dosing package suitable to serve main domestic
water storage tanks.
B. The generators shall convert the sodium chlorite to chlorine dioxide requiring a single precursor,
sodium chlorite (NaClO2), and electrochemical cassettes. The sodium chlorite shall be injected
from an external tank with spill containment into the generator(s) by a peristaltic metering pump
that is internal to the generator.
C. The generator(s) shall have a built-in water softener which will be controlled by the system’s
microprocessor and regenerate automatically. System shall have externally mounted 10 micron
carbon prefilter assembly for feed water filtration.
D. The generator(s) shall be supplied with sufficient cassettes and precursor for one year’s service.
Cassettes shall provide approximately 2,000 operating hours or 6 months of service, whichever
comes first, and have a shelf-life of six months.
E. The pump(s) on the dosing package shall be able to receive a variable 4-20 mA or pulsed signal
from a flow meter to ensure proper proportioned dosing of chlorine dioxide solution. The dosing
package shall contain all necessary components and materials of construction for safely storing
and metering the dilute chlorine dioxide solution produced by the generator.
F. The dosing package shall include a polypropylene tank with spill containment, a four float level
control system with high/ low level controls, and chemical metering pumps.
G. Chlorine dioxide dosing shall not exceed 0.5 mg/l.
H. System shall be completed with the following features:
1. Chemical level alarm.

2. Post pressure alarm.
3. Low pressure alarm.
4. Leak detection alarm.
5. Timer alarm.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. Cartridge Filters:
1. Freestanding Cartridge Filters:
a. Description: Simplex, floor-mounted housing with replaceable element(s) for

removing suspended particles from water.
1) Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate

and to direct feedwater through water filter element(s); with element
support(s) and base, feet, or skirt.
a) Fabricate supports and base, feet, or skirt and attachment to housing

with reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a
seismic event when filter base is anchored to building structure.
b) Pipe Connections (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to
ASME B1.20.1.
c) Steel Tank Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150
flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to

AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if housing is stainless

steel.
2) Element(s): Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.
b. Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent for particles 10 micrometer(s) and larger.

c. Pressure Drop: Not to exceed 14 kPa when clean.
d. Housing: Stainless steel.
e. Media: Pleated or pleated polyester; or pleated or wound PP.
2. Off-Floor Cartridge Filters:
a. Description: Simplex, wall-mounted housing with replaceable element for removing

suspended particles from water.
1) Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate

and to direct feedwater through water filter element; with element support.
a) Pipe Connections: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

b) Support: Wall bracket.
2) Element: Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.
b. Mounting: Wall.
c. Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent for particles 10 micrometer(s) and larger.
d. Pressure Drop: Not to exceed 14 kPa when clean.
e. Housing: PE or PP.
f. Media: Pleated or pleated polyester; or pleated or wound PP.
B. Sand Filters:
1. Circulating Sand Filters:
a. Construction: ASME code; carbon steel or FRP.
1) Pipe Connections (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to

ASME B1.20.1.
2) Steel Tank Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges
according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.
3) FRP Tank Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral;
Designation F, (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges of grade same as
tank material according to ASTM D 5421.
b. Strainer: Basket type.
1) Pipe Connections:
a) Connections (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to

ASME B1.20.1.
b) Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Class 125 flanges
according to ASME B16.1.
c. Piping: Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings.

d. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction,
centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
1) Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.

a) Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

b) Pressure Rating: (1035 kPa) minimum, subject to suit operating
pressure.
c) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
d) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
e) Seal: Mechanical.
2) Motor: General requirements for motors are specified in Section 220513

"Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
e. Controls: Automatic for control of circulating pump and tank backwash; factory
wired for single, external electrical connection.
1) Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure with time clock and pressure gages.
2) Pump: Automatic and manual.
3) Backwash: Automatic; with differential-pressure-switch initiation device.
4) Backwash Valve: Tank mounted.
f. Support: Skid mounting.

g. Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent for 1.8 minimum specific-gravity suspended
particles 10 micrometers and larger.
h. Filter Media: Graded silica sand.
2. Multimedia Sand Filters:
a. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex, duplex or triplex] multimedia,

sand-filter system of filter tank(s), media, piping, and controls for removing
sediment particles from water.
b. Tank Construction: ASME code; carbon steel or FRP.

ASME B1.20.1.
Designation F, (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges of grade same as tank
material according to ASTM D 5421.
4) Service Valve(s): Diaphragm type hydraulically operated.

d. Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent for particles 10 micrometers and larger.
e. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent.
f. Controls for Simplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for control of
filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory-wired for single, external electrical
connection.
g. Controls for Duplex and Triplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for
control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory-wired for single, external
electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and
not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time.
h. Support: Skid mounting.
i. Filter Media: Graded silica sand.
3. Greensand Filters:
a. Description: For removing iron and manganese.

b. Tank Construction: ASME code; carbon steel or FRP.


ASME B1.20.1.
Designation F, (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges of grade same as
tank material according to ASTM D 5421.
4) Service Valve(s): Diaphragm type hydraulically operated.

d. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent.
e. Controls for Simplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for control of
filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external electrical
connection.
f. Controls for Duplex and Triplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for
control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external
electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and
not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time.
g. Support: Skid mounting.
h. Media Tank(s): , Two, or Three.
i. Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent for particles 10 micrometers and larger.
j. Filter Media: Graded silica sand.
C. Separators:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex separator system of housing with

baffles and chambers, strainer, circulating pump, piping, and controls for removing
sediment particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.
a. Construction: ASME code.
1) Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of

feedwater.
2) Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation
of particles.
3) Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles.
4) Outlet: Near top of unit.
5) Purge: At bottom of collection chamber.
ASME B1.20.1.
7) Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.1; steel, Class 150
flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.
Provide stainless-steel flanges if tank is stainless steel.
b. Strainer: Basket type.

ASME B1.20.1.
2) Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Class 125 flanges
according to ASME B16.1.

d. Separator Efficiency: 98 percent for 1.85 micrometers and larger.
e. Safety Valves: Automatic and manual pressure relief.
f. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction,
centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
1) Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.
a) Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

b) Pressure Rating: minimum as per design requiremnet.

c) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
d) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
e) Seal: Mechanical.
2) Motor: General requirements for motors are specified in Section 220513

"Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
g. Controls: Automatic for control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory
wired for single, external electrical connection.
1) Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.

2) Pump: Automatic and manual.
3) Separator Purge: Automatic and manual.
h. Support: Skid mounting.
A. Before shipping, hydrostatically test carbon filters, circulating sand filters, multimedia sand filters,
greensand filters, separators, and ultra-violet sterilizers, to minimum of one and one-half times
pressure rating.
B. Prepare test reports.

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for electric
water heaters, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and
C. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Performance Efficiency: ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
F. ASME Compliance: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
G. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
H. Acceptable alternative codes and standards for compliance:
1. Comply with EU Regulation 814/2013 with regard to ecodesign requirements for water
heaters with rated heat output of up to 400kW and hot water storage tanks with a storage
volume of up to 2000 litres regarding limiting standing loss and product information.
Manufacturers to comply with the test methods in BS EN 50440 to measure the
performance of electric storage water heaters.
2. All equipment and assemblies which fall within the scope of the Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU, must be tested by the manufacturers, and be certified as
compliant with the Directive. Such compliance shall be evidenced by displaying the
appropriate CE Mark on the equipment and assemblies
3. For appliances not exceeding 70kW and hot water storage capacity not exceeding 500
litres, manufacturer to have undertaken an assessment of performance of hot water delivery
to BS EN 13203-1 and energy consumption to BS EN 13203-2.
4. Safety of electric storage water heater to BS EN 60335-2-21.
5. Safety of fixed electric immersion heater to BS EN 60335-2-73.

Requirements.”
design.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period..
1. Failures include heating elements and storage tanks.
2. Warranty Period(s): from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Heating elements: 5 years.
b. Storage Tanks: 10 years.
A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
1.6 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Booster Heaters:
1. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water booster heaters from single source from single
manufacturer.
2. Standard: UL 1453, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for operating on
voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
3. Tank: Corrosion-resistant metal or steel.
5. NSF 5 construction with Brackets for undercounter or Legs for floor installation.
6. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings
except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.” Surround entire storage tank except connections
and controls.
B. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single
manufacturer.
3. Tank: ASME-code, steel.
4. Horizontal or Vertical arrangement.
and controls.
7. Special Requirements: NSF/ANSI 5 construction.
C. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters: Steel, vertical arrangement

with 1035-kPa pressure rating.
1. Standard: UL 174, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for operating on
voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical drawings.
and controls.

a. Special Requirements: NSF/ANSI 5 construction.
1.7 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks: Steel tank with welded joints and butyl-rubber diaphragm;
1035-kPa pressure rating.
B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge.
C. Piping-type heat traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement in accordance with

ASHRAE/IES 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings” or ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2.
D. Heat-trap fittings.
E. Manifold kits.
F. Pressure-reducing valves.
G. Combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying
with PTC 25.
H. Pressure relief valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with PTC 25.
I. Vacuum relief valves: complying with PTC 25.
J. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at (172.5-kPa-) maximum
outlet pressure.
K. Shock absorbers, ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A.
L. Domestic-water heater stands.
M. Domestic-water heater mounting brackets.
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction,
in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating
before shipment.
C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.

SECTION 224100 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation for plumbing
fixtures, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing” SBC 701, and the
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Domestic water faucets intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to
comply with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372, or to
be certified in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 by a third-party certification body accredited
by the local authorities having jurisdiction, that the weighted average lead content at wetted
surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
1.4 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories, vitreous china, counter mounted or Pedestal or Integral Bowl Countertop or

Countertop-Mounted Bowl or
1. Standard:
a. ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china lavatories.
2. Type: Flat rim with ledge

3. Faucet Hole Punching: One or three holes.
4. Faucet-Hole Location:Rim.
1.5 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
B. Lavatory Faucets: Single-control mixing or Two-handle mixing valve.
1. Description: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
3. Body Material: General duty, copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.
4. Finish: Polished chrome plate
5. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.3 L/min..
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100

6. Centers: Adjustable.
7. Mounting: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
8. Spout: Rigid type.
1.6 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks - Counter Mounted: One bowl stainless steel.
1. Standard:
a. ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless steel kitchen sinks.
2. Dimensions: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.

3. Disposer: Not required.
4. Hot-Water Dispenser: Not required.
1.7 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets: Solid brass, kitchen sink.
1. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

2. Maximum Flow Rate for Sink Faucets: 3.8 L/min unless otherwise indicated.
3. Mixing Valve: Single control or Two-lever handle.
4. Mounting: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
5. Handle(s): Lever or Knob or as per Architectural selection catalogue.
6. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck.
7. Spout Outlet: Aerator or Laminar flow.
8. Drain: Stopper with chain.
1.8 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS
A. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces nonaerating, laminar stream.
1.9 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china.
1. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.14, and

ASSE 1037/ASME A112.1060/CSA B125.16
2. Bowl Type: Siphon jet.
3. Height: Standard or Handicapped/elderly.
4. Rim Contour: Regular.
5. Water Consumption: Low Flow type 4 L/flush maximum.
1.10 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

2. Material: Plastic.
3. Type: Residential.
4. Shape: As per ID.
5. Configuration: Closed front with cover.
6. Size: Regular.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

8. Seat Cover: Required.
1.11 BIBCOCK PERENNIAL HOSE
A. Bibcock Perennial Hose Type BPH: Bibcock Perennial Hose shall be 15mm, PN10, with heavy
duty inner tube, chrome plated, wall mounted with threads outlet, complete with 15mm angle
valve with blue index, chrome plated metal flexible tube, 1250 mm long with 15 mm nut, nozzle
and loop, chrome plated wall hook.

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
A. Standards:
1. Comply with ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for water closets.

2. Comply with ASME A112.19.5/CSA B45.15 for flush valves and spuds for water closets
and tanks.
3. Comply with IAMPO/ANSI Z124.5 for water-closet (toilet) seats.
4. Comply with ASME A112.6.1M for water-closet supports.
5. Comply with ICC A117.1 for ADA-compliant water closets.
6. Comply with ASTM A1045 for flexible PVC gaskets used in connection of vitreous china
water closets to sanitary drainage systems.
7. Comply with ASME A112.4.3 for plastic fittings used in connection of vitreous china
water closets to sanitary drainage systems.
1.4 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BACK-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, back outlet, top or back spud.
1. Material: Vitreous china.

2. Type: Siphon jet.
3. Style: Flushometer valve.
4. Height: Standard or ADA compliant for designated disabled toilets.
5. Water Consumption: 4 L per flush.
6. Support: Waste-fitting assembly.
1.5 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Wall mounted, top or back spud.

3. Style: Flushometer valve.
4. Mounting Height: Standard or ADA compliant for designated disabled toilets.
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213.13

5. Water Consumption: 4 L per flush.

6. Support: Waste-fitting assembly.
1.6 FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves
1. Style: Exposed or Concealed.

2. Consumption: 4 per flush.
B. Hydraulic-Actuator, Push-Button, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:

2. Consumption: 4 per flush.
1.7 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Type: Standard
2. Shape: Elongated rim, open front or Elongated rim, closed front.
3. Seat Cover: Required.
1.8 BIBCOCK PERENNIAL HOSE
A. Bibcock Perennial Hose Type BPH: Bibcock Perennial Hose shall be 15mm, PN10, with heavy
duty inner tube, chrome plated, wall mounted with threads outlet, complete with 15mm angle
valve with blue index, chrome plated metal flexible tube, 1250 mm long with 15 mm nut, nozzle
and loop, chrome plated wall hook.
COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213.13

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS
1.3 WALL-HUNG URINALS
A. Urinals - Wall Hung, Back or bottom Outlet, Siphon Jet: .
1. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5/CSA B45.15.

4. Water Consumption: 0.5 :Lpf
B. Urinals - Wall Hung, Back Outlet, Washout: Accessible.
1. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5/CSA B45.15.

3. Type: Washout with extended shields.
4. Water Consumption: 0.5 Lpf
1.4 FLUSHOMETER VALVES
A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves: .
1. Standard: ASSE 1037/ASME 112.1037/CSA B125.37.

2. Style: Exposed or Concealed as per interior designer.
3. Consumption: 0.5 Lper flush.
B. Hydraulic-Actuator, Push-Button, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:
1. Standard: ASSE 1037/ASME 112.1037/CSA B125.37.

3. Consumption: 0.5 L per flush.
COMMERCIAL URINALS 224213.16

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
1.3 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory - Rectangular, Oval, or Round as per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue,
Self-Rimming, Vitreous China, Counter Mounted:

2. Type: Self-rimming for above-counter mounting.
3. Nominal Size: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
4. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole or three holes.
5. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.
B. Lavatory - Oval, Vitreous China, Undercounter Mounted:

2. Type: For undercounter mounting.
3. Nominal Size: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue..
4. Faucet-Hole Punching: No holes.
5. Faucet-Hole Location: On countertop.
1.4 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory - Vitreous China, Wall Mounted:

2. Type: For wall hanging.
4. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole or three holes.
B. Lavatory - Wheelchair, Vitreous China, Wall Mounted:

2. Type: Slab or wheelchair.
3. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 686 by 508 mm.
4. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 51-mm centers.
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216.13

C. Lavatory - Corner Type, Vitreous China, Wall Mounted:

2. Type: Three-sided-front apron with three-sided back.
3. Nominal Size: Corner, 406 by 406 mm.
4. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 51-mm centers.
5. Faucet-Hole Location: Back wall.
6. Faucet: Manufacturer's standard, solid brass; factory installed.
1.5 MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS
A. Lavatory faucets intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to comply with
the with requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and with NSF 61/NSF 372, or
be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an accredited third-party certification body,
that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
B. Lavatory Faucets - Manual Type, Single-Control Mixing, Single-Control Nonmixing, or Two-

Handle Mixing as per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue, General Duty,:
1. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass or die-cast housing with brazed copper and brass
waterway.
4. Mounting Type: as per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
5. Valve Handle(s): as per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
8. Drain: Not part of faucet.
1.6 AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory faucets intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to comply with
the with requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and with NSF 61/NSF 372, or
be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an accredited third-party certification body,
that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.
B. Lavatory Faucets - Automatic-Type, Hardwired Electronic Sensor Operated, Mixing or

Nonmixing as per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue:
1. Body Type: Single hole.

2. Body Material: Commercial, solid-brass, or die-cast housing with brazed copper and brass
waterway.
5. Mounting Type: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216.13

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS
1.3 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sinks - Enameled Cast Iron, Trap Standard Mounted: .

2. Type: Service sink with back.
4. Color: White.
5. Mounting: DN 50 trap standard with grid strainer inlet, cleanout, and floor flange.
6. Rim Guard: On front and sides.
1.4 KITCHEN/UTILITY SINKS
A. Kitchen/Utility Sinks - Stainless Steel, Freestanding:
1. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF 2.

2. Type: Stainless steel, freestanding, sound-deadened unit with backsplash.
3. Number of Compartments: Two].
4. Material Thickness: 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
5. Compartment:
a. Drain: Grid with tailpiece and twist drain or stopper
6. Each Compartment of Multiple Compartment Sinks:

a. Drains: Grid with tailpiece and twist drain or stopper
7. Legs and Feet: Stainless steel tubing legs with adjustable bullet feet.
8. Faucet(s):
a. Number Required: Two.

b. Mounting: On backsplash.
9. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
COMMERCIAL SINKS 224216.16

b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Loose key or Wheel handle

2) Risers: DN 15, ASME A112.18.6/CSA B125.6 braided- or corrugated-
stainless steel flexible hose.
10. Waste Fittings:

b. Trap(s):
1) Size: DN 40
2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with
17-gauge brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.
c. Continuous Waste:
1) Size: DN 50.
2) Material: Chrome-plated, 17-gauge brass tube.
B. Kitchen/Utility Sinks - Stainless Steel, Counter Mounted: .

2. Type: Stainless steel, self-rimming, sound-deadened unit less ledge back or with ledge
back.
3. Number of Compartments: Two.
4. Overall Dimensions: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
5. Material: 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
a. Dimensions: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.

b. Drains: Grid with tailpiece and twist drain or stopper.
c. Depth: Standard or Wheelchair accessible as applicable.
7. Faucet(s): .
a. Number Required: One or Two as per Architectural drawings and selection

catalogue.
b. Mounting: On ledge.
8. Supply Fittings:

water-supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Loose key or Wheel handle.

2) Risers: DN 15, ASME A112.18.6/CSA B125.6, braided- or corrugated-
stainless-steel flexible hose.
9. Waste Fittings:

b. Trap(s):
1) Size: DN 40.


1) Size: DN 50.
10. Mounting: On counter with sealant.
C. Kitchen/Utility Sinks - Stainless Steel, Freestanding: .

2. Type: Stainless steel, freestanding, sound-deadened unit with backsplash.
3. Number of Compartments: Two.
4. Overall Dimensions: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.
5. Material Thickness: 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
a. Dimensions: As per Architectural drawings and selection catalogue.

b. Drains: Grid with tailpiece and twist drain or stopper.
7. Legs and Feet: Stainless steel tubing legs with adjustable bullet feet.
8. Faucet(s): .
a. Number Required: One or two as per Architectural drawings and selection

catalogue.
b. Mounting: On backsplash.
9. Supply Fittings:

water supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Loose key or Wheel handle.

2) Risers: DN 15, ASME A112.18.6/CSA B125.6 braided- or corrugated-
stainless steel flexible hose.
10. Waste Fittings:

b. Trap(s):
1) Size: DN 40.
1) Size: DN 50.
1.5 HANDWASH SINKS
A. Handwash Sinks - Stainless Steel: .


2. Type: Wall-mounted or Pedestal-base stainless steel basin with radius corners, back for
faucet, and support brackets.
3. Overall Dimensions: 432 by 406 by 127 mm.
4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
6. Support: Type II sink carrier.
7. Mounting Height: Standard, Child, or Accessible in accordance with ICC A117.1.
1.6 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink faucets intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption are to comply with
requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and with NSF 61 and NSF 372, or be
certified in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 by an ANSI-accredited third-party certification
body, in that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25
percent.
B. Commercial Sink Faucets - Automatic Type: Battery-powered or Hard-wired electronic-sensor-

operated, mixing
1. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
4. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass, or die-cast housing with brazed copper and brass
waterway.
5. Finish: Chrome plated or Polished chrome1 plate
6. Maximum Flow Rate: 3.8 L/min
7. Maximum Flow Rate for Prerinse spray valves used in dishwashing areas: 4.9 L/min unless
otherwise indicated.
8. Thermostatic Mixing Valve with check valves.
9. Control Module: water-resistant module with internal flow setting switches.
10. Drain: Not part of faucet
C. Commercial Sink Faucets - Manual Type: Single-control mixing.

waterway.
3. Finish: Chrome plated.
4. Maximum Flow Rate: 3.8 L/min.
7. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck.
8. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.
9. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow or Hose thread in accordance with ASME B1.20.7.
10. Pre-Rinse Unit: Combination rigid/flexible with riser, hose, spray valve and wall bracket.
D. Commercial Service Sink Faucets - Manual Type: .
1. Description: Wall/back mounted, brass body, with integral service stops, checks, spout
with bucket/pail hook, 20-mm hose thread end, integral vacuum breaker, inlets 200 mm
o.c., and two-handle mixing.
2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1, NSF 61 and NSF 372, ICC A117.1,
ASSE 1001 (VB).
3. Finish: Rough chrome plated or Polished chrome plated.
4. Cartridges: Ceramic.

5. Brace: Adjustable top or bottom brace.
E. Commercial Sink Faucets - Automatic Type: Hard-wired, electronic-sensor-operated, mixing,.
1. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
waterway.
5. Finish: Chrome plated or Polished chrome1 plate.
6. Maximum Flow Rate: 3.8 L/min.
9. Spout Type: Swivel, gooseneck.
10. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.
11. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: , with check valves.
12. Control Module: Below deck, water-resistant module with internal flow setting switches.
1.7 ABLUTION WATER TAP
A. Ablution Water Tap: Provide products complying with the following and as selected by Interior
Designer and as approved by Employer and Engineer:
1. Wall mounted self-closing tap, supply DN 15mm with air metering valve, ablution spout,
and anti-splash, with, flow rate 0.1 L/s.
1.8 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials in contact with
potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass or chrome-plated copper tubing, including wall flange.
D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valves.
1.9 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: DN 40, grid type.
C. Trap: DN 40, chrome-plated with wall flange.

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all NEOM’s guidelines and procedures,
apply to this Section.
C. Related Provisions:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500


(NEOM-NEV-TGD-602)
702)
bends, or elbows which may be required for installation of various materials, equipment, piping, and
ductwork systems in allotted spaces. The Contractor shall examine these and other available
E. All works not shown on drawings in complete detail shall be installed in conformance with accepted
standard practice and manufacturer’s recommendations.
equipment and materials as may be necessary in order to meet this requirement.
G. Work indicated on drawings, but not mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa, shall be performed
as if specifically mentioned or indicated by both
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project are as follows:
1. Climatic Conditions:
a. Latitude: 27°55 N
b. Longitude: 35°17 E.
c. Altitude: 15 m.
2. Outside Temperatures:
a. Dry Bulb: 43.5 deg.C.
b. Wet Bulb: 31.7 deg.C.
B. Indoor Design Conditions: Indoor comfort conditions are based on the recommendations of
ASHRAE Standard 55.
1. The following table represents the indoor design conditions adopted for the project
Area All Season

DB deg. c % RH
General
Lobbies 23 50
Pantry 23 50
Prayer room 23 50
Break room/lunchroom 23 50
Administrative Areas/Offices 23 50
Warehouse, Stores 26 50
Lockers Area 23 50
Mechanical Rooms 28 50
Meeting Room 23 50
Security Room 23 50
Screening/Scanning Areas 23 50
Waste Rooms 18 50
Workshops 23 50
First Aid 23 50
Electrical rooms
Transformer room (MV) 28 50
MDB room (LV) 28 50
Battery room (UPS) 22 50
Floor distribution electrical room 28 50
Telecom/ ELV rooms
Telecom Rooms 22 50

Tolerances:
Temperature : +/- 1°C
Relative Humidity : +/- 5% (Uncontrolled unless noted otherwise)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Comply with the requirements of Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures”, and additional
requirements specified below and in different sections of division 23
C. Shop Drawings:
following points
conflicts.
b. Shop drawings shall identify the related contract drawing number or related reference
drawing.
d. Shop drawings shall show schedules and description of equipment, valves, piping and
fittings.
movement.
m. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
o. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access panels
and other ceiling-mounted items.
s. Pipe sleeves.
a. Complete HVAC floor plans with a minimum of 1/50 scale.

a. HVAC mechanical rooms to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
a. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
b. Fabricated equipment to a minimum of 1/25 scale.

drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues are not clearly resolved,
when there is a question as to whether contract documents are being complied with or the
design intent is not being met.
D. Product Data:
21
include, but not be limited to, samples, test results and supporting documentation
E. Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be clearly denoted in
English and the native language of the area where the project is located.
A. Comply with the applicable requirements and recommendations of local Saudi Building Code (SBC)
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification for
HVAC products, equipment and systems, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Energy
Conservation Code-”, SBC 601, and “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed
D. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may
be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings
or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
E. Installer shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
incorporating HVAC systems and equipment similar to that required for the project.
F. All Material and equipment shall be new, unless stated otherwise and approved by the employer.
G. Manufacturer’s written directions and recommendations shall be followed. If these instructions are
different from the contract documents or referenced international standards, the more stringent
requirements shall establish the minimum standard. Any conflict shall be brought to the attention of
the engineer for clarification, prior to the execution of the work.
H. All electrical work related to HVAC items shall be as specified under Division 26, Electrical
I. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
J. Equipment and materials to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed, manufactured
and listed or approved for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse effects of weather

prevailing at the project location. The additional protective measures against outdoor weather
required by the manufacturers’ installation instructions and prevalent practice shall be provided.
K. Where two or more equipment or components are of the same class, the same manufacturer shall be
used for selecting the equipment; component parts of the entire system need not be products of the
same manufacturer.
L. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its
normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be
M. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a

N. Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors
O. All equipment with moving parts shall be protected against personal injury
P. [Compliance with the equivalent relevant EN/BS standards are acceptable subject to submitting a
comparison sheet showing equivalency of the requirements with the US standard for engineers
approval ]
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling, transport,
D. Protect stored pipes, tubes, flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. Elevate
above grade.
1.8 COORDINATION
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
admittance of all equipment before closing in.
E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access for operation,
service or maintenance that are concealed behind finished surfaces whether indicated on plans or
not. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

F. Coordinate connections of HVAC systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services where required.
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
A. All local codes and regulations shall become part of this specification and must be adhered to where
they exceed requirements as shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications, without
the code.
1.10 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt or change existing services without prior written approval. When interruption is
required, coordinate length of service time with employer to minimize disruption of occupant
activities. Depending on the length of the service time temporary equipment or pipe installation or
relocation might be required and shall be provided to maintain continuity of operation of existing
facilities.
number; list of each product referenced in manual; and name, address and telephone number
of installing contractor and maintenance contractor for each product.
particular installation; certified test and balance report; list of control point labels, and wiring
diagrams.
4. Full size sheets, if required, shall be folded into special holding pockets. Faxed, handwritten,
or illegible materials are not acceptable.
contents of operating and maintenance manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.

A. Contractors are cautioned that they must exercise extreme care in any activity involving contact with
any installed roof membrane.

1.14 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of underground service, utilities, structures, etc., which may
be encountered or be affected by his work and shall be responsible for any damage caused by neglect
to provide proper precautions or protection.
1. A minimum of 24 hours of on-site overview of the overall HVAC System.

2. Refer to Division 23 sections for specific training on each of the components of the HVAC
System.
1.16 WELDING
conditions.
2. Comply with the set standards in the specification.

3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping and
systems.
C. Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for fusion welding shall
conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify processes and operators
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications, and AWS B2.1 /B2.1M, and / or, as approved by the Qualifications."
welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including welds
with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed to weld
only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds with his
specific code marking signifying his name and number as signed.
H. Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during or after
installation.
I. Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over the
defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be re-
qualified.
J. Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and dampness during
A. Refer to Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment section, for
sound and vibration requirements.
B. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or vibration.
Noticeable sound outside the room in which moving equipment are installed, or annoyingly
instructions.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Division 01 for all components and with special warranties listed in individual section
of Division 23

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
B. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.. The
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such
as controls, instruments, Operator interface devices, shall be the current generation of technology
and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record . The 5 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturer’s catalogs or brochures. Products having less than a 5
years field service record shall not be acceptable.
C. Material shall be supported by a local service organization, authorized and trained by the
mannufacturer of the equipment supplied. System components shall be enviromentally suitable for
the indicated locations.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved joining materials not
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
a. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved dielectric fittings not
B. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum

working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved mechanical sleeve
seals not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 23
and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
C. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
D. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
E. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections.Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved flexible
connectors not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of
division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail
B. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 860 kPa (125-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working
pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. .DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing

covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Stainless-Steel-Hose / Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors:
Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples
or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860 kPa (125-psig) minimum working-
pressure rating at 104. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved sleeves not listed
below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 23 and this section,
individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
F. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
G. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
H. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved escutcheons not listed
below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 23 and this section,
B. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
F. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
G. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved grout not listed below.
In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division 23 and this section,
B. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,

and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.9 SCREWS
A. Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HVAC SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. All items shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
B. The installation shall comply fully with all applicable standards and codes listed in individual
sections of Division 23.
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching"
B. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or cutting.

C. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects passing through.
D. Do not pierce beams or columns without written permission from the structural engineer and then
only as directed.
systems.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K. Size reduction shall be made using reducing fittings; bushings are not acceptable.
L. Independently support piping so that its weight shall not be supported by the equipment to which it
is connected.
M. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping,
N. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half (1/2) the diameter of
the main.
O. Cover ends of piping during installation to keep inside of piping clean.
P. Piping shall not be routed through electrical rooms or transformer vaults, or above transformers,
Q. Use only wrenches having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass specialties;
S. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors in finished spaces.

T. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
U. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
V. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
W. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
X. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Y. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Z. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
AA. Conveniently locate control panels, hardware and devices, valves, gauges, cleanout fittings, and
other equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs, or
removal and replacement.
BB. Install thermometers and gauges to be easily read from floors, platforms, and walkways.
CC. Install piping at the required slope indicated in the specification and/or drawings
DD. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
EE. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Non-pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.

indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

E. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts.
A. Refer to Division 23 specification section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.8 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections

support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
3.10 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.

embedded.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
3.12 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
A. Complete all phases of work so the system, equipment, and components can be checked out, started,
calibrated, operationally tested, adjusted, balanced, functionally tested, and otherwise
Contract Documents.

equipment.
6. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease, adhesive, labels,
and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished bronze or brass Work shall
be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
7. Before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to completely remove
grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps, strainers, boilers, flush
valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Compressed air, oil, and gas piping
shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas.

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
B. Refer to Section 230500 “Common Work Results for HVAC” for applicable NEOM provisions.
as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and the standards
C. Comply with NEMA MG1.
F. Comply with IEC 60529.
B. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 46.1 deg C and at altitude of 625 m above sea
level.
C. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous running duty
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513

D. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
E. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1 or IC
F. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to NEMA
G. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to IEC
H. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient tempera-
I. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1 or
J. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.
K. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection and
L. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding protection
M. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and bear-
N. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller suppliers to
1.5 MATERIALS

4. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque or Separate winding for each speed as applicable.
6. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
above.


thrust loading.
D. Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM):
1. Brushless, permanent magnet type, with ball bearing design.

2. Designed for synchronous rotation and able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or
vertical orientation.
3. Energy-Efficient Design: Super premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE4 to IEC
60034-30-1.
4. EC Motor Service Factor: 1.15.
5. Motor shall be resiliently mounted, self-aligning and oiled for life.
6. ECM built-in electronic drive suitable for either manual and/or DDC controlled flow
adjustments.
7. Variable speed with motor speed input compatible with the DDC analog outputs range.
8. Motor shall be completed with Thermal Overload Protector (TOP).
9. Motor to be controlled and regulated by a DC signal supplied from a field instrument, DDC
controller or BMS.

SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, and
identification for expansion fittings and loops, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi
Mechanical Code”, SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent.
C. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,
and temperatures.
B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Packed Expansion Joints:
1. Flexible, Ball-Joint Packed Expansion Joints: Carbon steel with asbestos-free composition
packing.
a. Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials";
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-
containing parts and bolting.
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa at 204 deg C.
c. End Connections for DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.
d. End Connections for DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.
2. Slip-Joint Packed Expansion Joints: Carbon steel with asbestos-free PTFE packing.
a. Standard: ASTM F1007.

c. Configuration: double joint with base class(es).
d. End Connections: Flanged or welded ends to match piping system.
B. Packless Expansion Joints:
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516

1. Metal, Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa.

b. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper
pipe ends.
1) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 50 and Smaller: threaded.

2) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 65 to DN 100: Threaded.
c. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe ends;

and carbon-steel shroud.
1) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.

2) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 65: Flanged.
2. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres.
a. Standard: ASTM F112

c. End Connections for DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.
3. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:
a. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two
flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center
section of flexible hose.
b. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.
c. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing DN 50 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with
d. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing DN 65 to DN 100: Copper-alloy fittings with
solder-jolint end connections.
e. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 50 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with
threaded end connections.
f. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 65 to DN 150: Carbon-steel fittings with
g. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 200 to DN 300: Carbon-steel fittings with
h. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping DN 350 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with
4. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:

b. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.
c. Configuration: Single joint with base and double joint with base class(es) unless
d. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- and two-ply phosphor-bronze bellows,
copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds.
1) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 50 and Smaller: Flanged.

2) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 65 to DN 100: Flanged.
3) End Connections for Copper Tubing DN 125 and Larger: Flanged.
e. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single-and two-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel
pipe ends, and carbon-steel shroud.
1) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 50 and Smaller: Flanged.

2) End Connections for Steel Pipe DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.

f. Expansion Joints for Stainless Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,

stainless steel pipe ends, and carbon-steel shroud.
1) End Connections for Steel Pipe (DN 50) and Smaller: Flanged-, unless
2) End Connections for Steel Pipe (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged-, unless
otherwise indicated
5. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:

b. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber.
c. Spherical Type: Single and double spheres with external control rods.
d. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalis, or Chemicals: Butyl Rubber.
e. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: [Buna-N] [CSM]
<Insert material>.
f. Material for Water: Butyl Rubber.
g. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings drilled
to match flange bolts.
C. Alignment Guides and Anchors:
1. Alignment Guides: Steel, factory fabricated.

2. Anchor Materials:
a. Steel shapes and plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

b. Bolts and nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel hex head.
c. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers.
d. Wedge-type mechanical anchor fasteners.
1) Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2) Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
e. Insert-type chemical anchor fasteners.
1) Bonding Material: ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component

epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
2) Stud: ASTM A307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud.
f. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
g. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink
1) Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.
2) Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3) Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
sleeve seals for plumbing piping, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code –
General“, SBC 201, and “Saudi Mechanical Code”, SBC 501, and the standards listed below in
this section; whichever is more stringent.
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated ductile iron, with plain ends.
plain ends.
collar.
B. Manufactured, HDPE or ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel
sleeve-type, waterstop assembly for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.
A. Manufacturered, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral cast flashing flange, with underdeck
clamp.
sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N).

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517

1.7 GROUT
1.8 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant.
B. Silicone, S, P, T, NT: Single-component, 25 pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and
cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
system.
system.
waterstops.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
HVAC piping, and as per the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
1.4 PRODUCTS
2. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.
3. Insulated Piping: One-piece stamped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish or Split-
plate stamped steel, exposed hinge, with polished, chrome-plated finish.
4. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
5. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped steel with
polished, chrome-plated finish or Split-plate stamped steel, concealed hinge, with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
6. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass or split-casting brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
7. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated
finish, or One-piece stamped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish, or Split-plate,
stamped steel, concealed hinge, with polished, chrome-plated finish.
B. Floor Plates: Split-plate stamped steel with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all NEOM’s guidelines and procedures,
design.

Requirements.”
A. Pipe hangers and equipment supports designed by Contractor.
B. Seismic-restraint hangers and supports designed by Contractor and approval obtained from
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a professional engineer.
A. Products and materials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in Section 016000
“Product Requirements.
B. Comply with the applicable requirements and recommendations of local Saudi Building Code (SBC)
for materials, tests, and installation, as listed in the “Saudi Sanitary Code-Plumbing”, SBC 701, and
C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. Metal Pipe Hangers and Supports: Carbon steel.
B. Trapeze pipe hangers.
C. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
D. Metal Framing Systems:
1. Manufacturer: MFMA.
2. Material: Carbon steel Coating: None.
E. Fiberglass strut systems.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529

1. For Cold Piping: Cellular glass.
G. Fastener Systems: Powder-actuated fasteners and mechanical-expansion anchors.
H. Pipe Stands: Compact Equipment supports.
I. Outside equipment stands.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
and the latest applicable local regulations for vibration and seismic controls, as listed in, but not
limited to, the “Saudi Building Code-General”, SBC 201, “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and
“Saudi Fire Code” SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic re-

straints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment
will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article below. Include the
following:
assembled components or on calculations.
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
1. Applicable Wind-Restraint Loading Reference: Comply with SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7-10.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548

5. .
Ss=0.55g.
S1 =0.13g.
1.4 COMPONENTS
properties.
a. Sandwich Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric

2. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or

other elastomeric material.
4. Open-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, with not less than 80 percent of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load.
5. Housed-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, in two-part telescoping housing.
6. Restrained-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators with
vertical-limit stop restraint.
7. Housed-Restrained-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with vertical-
limit stop restraint in two-part telescoping housing.
8. Pipe-Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor.
9. Resilient pipe guides.
10. Air-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, single or multiple, compressed-air bellows.
11. Restrained-Air-Spring Isolators: Freestanding, single or multiple, compressed-air bellows
with vertical-limit stop restraint.
13. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hangers with spring and
insert in compression and with vertical-limit stop.
bushings.
2. Restraint Channel Bracings: Shop- or field-fabricated bracing assemblies.
3. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod.
4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
5. Anchor Bolts: Mechanical type, seismic rated.
C. Vibration Isolation Equipment Bases:
1. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

2. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for field-
applied, cast-in-place concrete.

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, and installation for HVAC identification, as
listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501 and the standards listed below
in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Quality Standard for Piping Identification: ASME A13.1.
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Equipment Labels: Plastic.
B. Warning Signs and Labels: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick with fasteners.
C. Pipe Labels: Self-adhesive.
D. Duct Labels: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick with adhesive.
E. Stencils: Aluminum Brass Fiberboard Fiberboard or metal.
F. Valve Tags: aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness.
G. Warning Tags: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm); brass grommet and wire fasteners.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: Conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies
and procedures plan, to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: AABC or TABB certified.
1.4 SUMMARY
A. TAB for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.
c. Multizone systems.
2. Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

b. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.
3. Fuel oil systems for HVAC.

4. Equipment:
a. Motors.
b. Chillers.
c. Cooling towers.
d. Condensing units.
5. Sound tests.
6. Vibration tests.
7. Duct leakage tests verification.
8. Pipe leakage tests verification.
9. UFAD plenum leakage tests verification.
10. HVAC-control system verification.
11. Smoke-control system tests.
1.5 EXECUTION
A. Tolerances:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Chilled-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
4. Maintaining design pressure relationships is to take priority over specific tolerances.
B. Inspections: Random checks by TAB’s specialist test and balance engineer in the presence of
engineer to verify final TAB report.
C. Additional Tests: Random tests within 90 days of completing TAB to verify balance conditions and
seasonal tests.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, and installation, for HVAC piping
insulation, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, “Saudi Energy
Conservation Code” SBC 601 and 602, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is
more stringent.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics for insulation and related materials, noncombustible, as defined

by NFPA 220 and tested according to ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 225:
1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.
2. All Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
C. Mockup of each type of pipe insulation and finish.
design.

Requirements.”
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless-
steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-developed
classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in
accordance with ASTM C795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manu-

facturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.
G. Mineral-Fiber,: glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor appli-
cations. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449.
8. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.
9. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
H. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous cal-
cium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
1.6 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.
1. Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

2. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Wet Flash Point: Below minus 18 deg C.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
1.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.8 SEALANTS
A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 101 to plus 121 deg C.

b. Color: White or gray.
C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C.
1.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 271 g/sq. m.
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, flame-retardant all purpose, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with

kraft-paper backing.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness : Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick .
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 0.025-mm- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

1.11 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Thickness: 0.16 mm.

2. Adhesion: 1.0 N/mm in width.
3. Tensile Strength: 7.2 N/mm in width.
1.12 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, Galvanized
Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
B. Wire: (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy ; (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel or (1.6-mm) soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
1.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water: (2 to 24 Deg C):
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be as follows:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: (19 mm) thick.
2. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.

3. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
4. Finish: None.
B. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 10 deg C .

3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, all sizes: 19 mm.

6. Finish: None.
C. Chilled Water, (2-24 Deg C) and below:
a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: (50 mm) thick.

2. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where exposed to
view or in mechanical rooms.
4. Finish: None.
D. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium silicate.

6. Finish: None.
E. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.
1. Operating Temperature: 454 deg C and lower.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium silicate.
a. Pipe, all sizes: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Stainless steel.

6. Finish: None.
1.15 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose fill insulation
for belowground piping, is specified in piping distribution Sections.
B. Service: Refrigerant suction.


6. Finish: None.
C. Chilled Water: (2-24 Deg C).
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: (50 mm) thick.

4. Finish: None.
D. Condensate Drain Piping: (2-24 Deg C):

a. Flexible Elastomeric: (19 mm) thick.

4. Finish: None.
E. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.

6. Finish: None.
F. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.
1. Operating Temperature: 454 deg C and lower.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.
a. Pipe, all sizes: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick..

6. Finish: None.

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System Description: Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital

conversion and program logic.
B. DDC System: Complete turnkey Building Management System (BMS) with web interface
capabilities.
C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design DDC system.
D. DDC System Speed:
1. Response Time of Connected I/O:
a. AI Point Values: Two seconds.

b. BI Point Values: Two seconds.
c. AO Points: Two seconds.
d. BO Point Values: Two seconds.
E. Network Bandwidth: 30 percent available spare bandwidth.
F. BMS Data Storage: 24 consecutive months of historical data for all I/O points connected to
system.
G. Future Expandability: Two times total I/O points.
H. Precision of I/O Reported Values:
1. Current:
a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere.

b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and
more.
2. Energy:
a. Electric Power:
1) Rate (Watts): Nearest 1/10th of a watt through 1000 W.

2) Rate (Kilowatts): Nearest 1/10th of a kilowatt through 1000 kW; nearest
kilowatt above 1000 kW.
3) Usage (Kilowatt-Hours): Nearest kilowatt through 10,000 kW; nearest 10
kW between 10,000 and 100,000 kW; nearest 100 kW for above 100,000
kW.
b. Thermal, Rate:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923

1) Cooling: For tons, nearest ton up to 1000 tons; nearest 10 tons between 1000
and 10,000 tons; nearest 100 tons above 10,000 tons (For watts, nearest watt
up to 1000 W; for kilowatts, round to nearest kilowatt up to 1000 kW;
nearest 10 kW between 1000 and 10,000 kW; nearest 100 kW for above
10,000 kW).
c. Thermal, Usage:
1) Cooling: For ton-hours, nearest ton-hours up to 1000 ton-hours; nearest 10
ton-hours between 1000 and 10,000 ton-hours; nearest 100 tons above
10,000 tons (For watt-hours, nearest watt-hour up to 1000 Wh; for kilowatt-
hours, round to nearest kilowatt-hour up to 1000 kWh; nearest 10 kWh
between 1000 and 10,000 kWh; nearest 100 kWh for above 10,000 kWh).
3. Flow:
a. Air: Nearest 1/10th of a cfm through 100 cfm; nearest cfm between 100 and
1000 cfm; nearest 10 cfm between 1000 and 10,000 cfm; nearest 100 cfm above
10,000 cfm (Nearest 1/10th of a L/s through 100 L/s; nearest L/s between 100 and
1000 L/s; nearest 10 L/s between 1000 and 10,000 L/s; nearest 100 L/s above
10,000 L/s).
b. Water: Nearest 1/10th gpm through 100 gpm; nearest gpm between 100 and
1000 gpm; nearest 10 gpm between 1000 and 10,000 gpm; nearest 100 gpm above
10,000 gpm (Nearest 1/10th of a L/s through 100 L/s; nearest L/s between 100 and
1000 L/s; nearest 10 L/s between 1000 and 10,000 L/s; nearest 100 L/s above
10,000 L/s).
c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th lb/hr through 100 lbs/hr; nearest lbs/hr between 100 and
1000 lbs/hr; nearest 10 lbs/hr above 1000 lbs/hr (Nearest 1/10th of a L/s through
100 L/s; nearest L/s between 100 and 1000 L/s; nearest 10 L/s between 1000 and
10,000 L/s; nearest 100 L/s above 10,000 L/s).
4. Gas:
a. Carbon Dioxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.

b. Carbon Monoxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.
c. Oxygen (Percentage): Nearest 1/10th of 1 percent.
d. Refrigerant (ppm): Nearest ppm.
5. Moisture (Relative Humidity):
a. Relative Humidity (Percentage): Nearest 1 percent.
6. Level: Nearest 1/100th of an inch through 10 inches; nearest 1/10 of an inch between 10
and 100 inches; nearest inch above 100 inches (Nearest 1/100th of a mm through 10 mm;
nearest 1/10th of a mm between 10 and 100 mm; nearest mm above 100 mm).
7. Speed:
a. Rotation (rpm): Nearest 1 rpm.

b. Velocity: Nearest 1/10th fpm through 100 fpm; nearest fpm between 100 and
1000 fpm; nearest 10 fpm above 1000 fpm (Nearest 1/100th of a M/s through 10
M/s; nearest 1/10th of a M/s above 10 M/s).
8. Position, Dampers and Valves (Percentage Open): Nearest 1 percent.

9. Pressure:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th in. w.c. (Nearest Pa up to 1000 Pa;
nearest 10 Pa above 1000 Pa).
b. Space: Nearest 1/100th in. w.c. (Nearest 1/10th Pa).
c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig (Nearest
kPa through 1000 kPa; nearest 10 kPa above 1000 kPa).

d. Water: Nearest 1/10 psig through 100 psig; nearest psig above 100 psig (Nearest
kPa through 1000 kPa; nearest 10 kPa above 1000 kPa).
10. Temperature:
a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

b. Outdoor: Nearest degree.
c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
d. Chilled Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
e. Condenser Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
f. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree.
g. Heat Recovery Runaround: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.
h. Steam: Nearest degree.
11. Vibration: Nearest 1/10th in/s (Nearest 1/10th mm/s).

12. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.
I. Environmental Conditions for equipment:
1. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC
60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless
specifically noted otherwise within these documents.
2. Hazardous Locations: Intrinsically safe or Explosion-proof rating for condition.
J. Electric Power Quality:
1. Power-Line Surges:
a. Protect DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from power-line

surges.
b. No fuses for surge protection.
c. Two waveforms:
1) 10-by-1000-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 V and a peak

current of 60 A.
2) 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 V and a peak
current of 500 A.
2. Power Conditioning: DDC system products.

3. Ground Fault: Protect products.
K. Backup power source.
L. DDC System Products Powered by UPS:
1. Desktop operator workstation.

2. Printer.
3. Servers.
4. Gateways.
5. Network Automation Controllers (NAC’s)
6. DDC controllers, except application-specific controllers (ASC’s).
M. Continuity of operation after electric power interruption for applications with systems and
equipment connected to backup power systems.

1.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Panel-Mounted, Manual Override Switches:
1. Manual override of control dampers.

2. Manual override of control valves.
1.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. System architecture shall consist of no more than two levels of LANs.
B. The converged data network shall be used for the Management Level whereas dedicated LAN’s
can be provided at the Automation Level to connect ASC’s and other equipment to NAC’s
C. Modular and able to expand to not less than two times system size.
D. Perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing network equipment.
E. Number of LANs and associated communication transparent to operator.
F. Independence of any single device for system alarm reporting and control execution.
1.5 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES
A. Operator Means of System Access:
1. Desktop and portable operator workstation with hardwired connection.

2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port.
3. Portable operator workstation with wireless connection through LAN router.
4. Mobile device with wireless connection through LAN router.
5. Remote connection using outside of system personal computer or mobile device through
web access.
6. Remote connection using portable operator workstation and telephone dial-up modem.
B. Operator transparent access to system, regardless of operator means used.
C. Hardwired Network Ports:
1. Each mechanical equipment room.

2. Each boiler room.
3. Each chiller room or outdoor chiller yard.
4. Each cooling tower location.
5. Each different roof level with roof-mounted air-handling units or rooftop units.
6. Security system command center.
7. Fire-alarm system command center.
D. Desktop Workstation:
1. Connect to Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a
communications port on a DDC controller.
2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN.
3. Able to communicate, with modems, remotely with any device connected to any DDC
system LAN.
E. POT:
1. Connect DDC controller through a communications port local to controller.

2. Able to communicate with any DDC system controller that is directly connected with LAN.
F. Mobile Device:
1. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to LAN.

2. Able to communicate with any DDC controller connected to DDC system.
G. Telephone Communications:
1. Through use of a standard modem to communicate with any device connected to any
system LAN.
2. Have auto-dial and auto-answer communications.
3. Desktop and Portable Operator Workstation Computers with Modems:
a. Operators able to perform control functions, report functions, and database

generation and modification functions.
b. Automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent remotely.
c. Communications transparent to operator.
4. DDC Controllers: No modems.

5. DDC Controllers with Modems:
a. Automatically place calls to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical
information for archiving.
b. Analyze and prioritize alarms to minimize initiation of calls.
c. Buffer noncritical alarms in memory and report them as a group of alarms, or until
an operator manually requests an upload.
d. Make provisions for handling busy signals, no-answers, and incomplete data
transfers.
e. Call default devices when communications cannot be established with primary
devices.
H. Critical Alarm Reporting:
1. Operator-selected critical alarms sent by DDC system.

2. Send alarm notification to multiple recipients.
3. Notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message, and prerecorded
phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.
I. Simultaneous Operator Use: Five simultaneous operators.
1.6 NETWORKS
A. Acceptable Networks for Connecting Operator Workstations and Network Controllers:
1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET.

2. CEA-709.1-C.
3. IP.
4. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.
B. Acceptable Networks for Connecting Programmable Application Controllers:

2. CEA-709.1-C.
3. IP.
C. Acceptable Networks for Connecting Application-Specific Controllers:


2. CEA-709.1-C.
3. EIA-485A.
4. IP.
1.7 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTCOL
A. Industry Standard Protocols:
1. ASHRAE 135 BACnet Open Communication Protocol.

2. CEA-709.1-C.
3. Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b.
1.8 DESKTOP WORKSTATION
A. Personal computer.
B. Keyboard.
C. Pointing device.
D. Flat panel display monitor.
E. Speakers.
F. I/O cabling.
1.9 POT
A. Capability:
1. Display and monitor BI point status.

2. Change BO point set point (on or off, open or closed).
3. Display and monitor analog point values.
4. Change analog control set points.
5. Command a setting of AO point.
6. Display and monitor I/O point in alarm.
7. Add a new or delete an existing I/O point.
8. Enable and disable I/O points, initiators, and programs.
9. Display and change time and date.
10. Display and change time schedules.
11. Display and change run-time counters and run-time limits.
12. Display and change time and event initiation.
13. Display and change control application and DDC parameters.
14. Display and change programmable offset values.
15. Access DDC controller initialization routines and diagnostics.
1.10 SERVERS
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Energy Star compliant.

2. The server shall the latest available technology in terms of processor model and processing
speed.

3. Dual power supply

4. RAM:
a. Capacity: 64 GB
b. Expandable Capacity: 128 GB
5. Redundant Array of Independent Disks: Five

6. Hard-Drive Storage: Two TB storage and nominal rotational speed of 7200 rpm.
7. Network Interface: Dual port Ethernet.
8. DVD +RW Drive.
9. Color, flat-screen display with 25” diagonal viewable area.
10. Keyboard and mouse.
11. Next-day on-site warranty for two year period following Substantial Completion.
1.11 PRINTER
A. Color laser A3 printer.
1.12 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. System Software Minimum Requirements:
1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 64 bit operating system.

2. Capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows applications.
3. Database management software.
4. Network communications software manages and controls multiple network
communications.
5. Operator interface software includes day-to-day operator transaction processing, alarm and
report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom
programming, and online data modification capability.
6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and
exception day programs.
B. Operator Interface Software:
1. English language.
2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard.
3. Manual operator sign-off.
4. Programmable automatic sign-off period.
5. Recorded and printed operator sign-on and sign-off activity.
6. Security access.
7. Data segregation.
8. Operators Commands:
a. Start or stop selected equipment.

b. Adjust set points.
c. Add, modify, and delete time programming.
d. Enable and disable process execution.
e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point.
f. Enable and disable totalization for each point.
g. Enable and disable trending for each point.
h. Override control loop set points.
i. Enter temporary override schedules.
j. Define holiday schedules.
k. Change time and date.
l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits.
m. Enter and modify analog warning limits.
n. View limits.

o. Enable and disable demand limiting.

p. Enable and disable duty cycle.
q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.
9. Reporting:
a. General listing of points.

b. List points currently in alarm.
c. List of off-line points.
d. List points currently in override status.
e. List of disabled points.
f. List points currently locked out.
g. List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file.
h. List weekly schedules.
i. List holiday programming.
j. List of limits and deadbands.
10. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected group(s),
or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.
C. Graphic interface software.
D. Project-specific graphics.
E. Customizing software.
F. Alarm handling software.
G. Reports and logs.
H. Standard Reports:
1. All I/O: With current status and values.

2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout.
3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled.
4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic.
5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm.
6. Logs:
a. Alarm history.
b. System messages.
c. System events.
d. Trends.
I. Custom reports.
J. Tenant override reports.
K. HVAC equipment reports.
L. Project-specific utility reports.
M. Project-specific daily, weekly, monthly and annually energy reports.
N. Project-specific daily, weekly, monthly and annually HVAC system efficiency reports.
O. Project-specific daily, weekly, monthly and annually PUE reports.
P. Weather reports.

Q. Standard trends.
R. Custom trends.
S. Database management software.
1.13 OFFICE APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. Multiple separate applications using a common platform for all applications and including the
following:
1. Database.
2. E-mail.
3. Presentation.
4. Publisher.
5. Spreadsheet.
6. Word processing.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Schedule preventive maintenance and generate work orders for mechanical and electrical
equipment and systems.
B. Inventory tracking database.
C. Dedicated printer.
1.15 ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) GATEWAYS
A. Gateway Minimum Requirements:
1. Read and view all readable object properties on non-BACnet network to BACnet network
and vice versa where applicable.
2. Write to all writeable object properties on non-BACnet network from BACnet network and
vice versa where applicable.
3. Include single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols)
translation from non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.
4. Includes data sharing read property, data sharing write property, device management
dynamic device binding, and device management communication control.
5. Hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway
communications.
6. Backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download,
backup, and restore gateway configuration.
1.16 ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) PROTOCOL ANALYZER
A. Analyzer minimum capabilities:
1. Capture and store to a file data traffic on all network levels.

2. Measure bandwidth usage.
3. Filtering options with ability to ignore select traffic.

1.17 CEA-709.1-C (LON) NETWORK HARDWARE
A. Routers.
B. Gateways.
1.18 WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Single-band wireless routers.
B. Dual-band wireless routers.
1.19 DDC CONTROLLERS
A. DDC Controller Spare Processing Capacity:
1. Network Controllers: 50 percent.

2. Programmable Application Controllers: 50 percent.
3. Application-Specific Controllers: 50 percent.
B. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity:
1. Network Controllers: 20 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller.
2. Programmable Application Controllers: 20 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point
connected to controller.
3. Application-Specific Controllers: 20 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected
to controller.
C. Input and Output Point Interface:
1. Controller AIs perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution

of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.
2. Controller AOs perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution
of 12 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.
3. BIs include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available
control devices and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.
4. Controller BOs include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and
maintained operation of output devices.
D. DDC panels shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BMS controllers.
1.20 NETWORK CONTROLLERS
A. BTL listed as BACnet/IP Building Controller (B-BC)
B. Communication: Communicate with other devices on DDC system network.
C. Operator Interface: Equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable
operator's workstation or mobile device.
D. Local keypad and display.
1.21 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. BTL listed as BACnet/IP Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)

B. Communication: Communicate with other devices on network.
C. Operator Interface: Equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable
operator's workstation or mobile device.
D. Local keypad and display.
1.22 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. BTL listed as BACnet MS/TP Application Specific Controller (B-AAC)
B. Microprocessor-based controllers.
C. Operator interface with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's
workstation. Connection shall extend to port on space temperature sensor that is connected to
controller.
1.23 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. General Controller Software Requirements: I/O points shall be identified by up to 30 character

point name and up to 16 character point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator
workstations.
B. Security: Individual security passwords and user names.
C. Scheduling:
1. Weekly Schedule: Include separate schedules for each day of week.

2. Exception Schedules: Operator able to designate any day of the year as an exception
schedule.
3. Holiday Schedules: Operator able to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules.
D. System Coordination: Operator able to group equipment based on function and location.
E. Binary Alarms: Alarm based on operator-specified state.
F. Analog Alarms: Both high and low alarm limits and able to be automatically and manually
disabled.
G. Alarm Reporting: Able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm, routed to appropriate
operator workstations based on time and other conditions, and able to start programs, print, be
logged in event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.
H. Remote Communication: Able to dial out in the event of an alarm.
I. Electric power demand limiting.
J. Maintenance Management: Monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based
on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.
K. Sequencing: Application software to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and other applicable
HVAC equipment.
L. Control Loops
1. Support Control Loops:

a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control.

b. Proportional control.
c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control.
d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.
e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).
M. Staggered-start applications.
N. Energy calculations.
O. Anti-short cycling.
P. On and off control with differential.
Q. Run-time totalization.
1.24 RELAYS
A. General-purpose relays.
B. Multifunction time-delay relays.
C. Latching relays.
D. Current sensing relay.
E. Combination on-off status sensor and on-off relay.
1.25 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES
A. Transformers.
B. Power-line conditioner.
C. Transient voltage suppression and high-frequency noise filter unit.
D. DC power supply.
1.26 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) UNITS
A. 250 through 1000 VA.
B. 1000 through 3000 VA.
1.27 PIPING AND TUBING
A. Pneumatic, and Pressure Instrument Signal Air, Tubing and Piping:
1. Copper tubing.
2. Copper tubing connectors and fittings.
3. Galvanized-steel piping.
4. Polyethylene tubing.
5. Polyethylene tubing connectors and fittings.
B. Process Tubing:

1. Copper tubing.
2. Copper tubing connectors and fittings.
3. Stainless steel tubing.
4. Stainless steel tubing connectors and fittings.
1.28 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.
B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V.
C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less.
D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for
network being installed.
1.29 ACCESSORIES
A. Pneumatic pressure gauges.
B. Pressure electric switches.
C. Damper blade limit switches.
D. I/P and E/P transducers.
E. E/P switches.
F. Instrument enclosures.
G. Manual valves.
1. Needle type.
2. Ball type.
H. Wall-mounted portable operator's workstation cabinet.
1.30 IDENTIFICATION
A. Instrument Air Pipe and Tubing: Engraved tags with the service and pressure range.
B. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices: Engraved tags.
C. Valve tags: Brass tags and brass chains attached to valve.
D. Raceway and Boxes: Painted labels on cover plates.
E. Equipment Warning Labels: Acrylic label with pressure-sensitive adhesive back and peel-off
protective jacket.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor engaged.


SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES
1.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES
A. Pressure-Independent Ball Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Body: Forged brass, nickel plated, and with threaded ends.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
3. Stem and Stem Extension: Chrome-plated brass, blowout-proof design.
4. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
1.3 GLOBE-STYLE CONTROL VALVES
A. Pressure-Independent Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Globe Style: Single port.

2. Body: Cast bronze or forged brass.
3. End Connections: Threaded.
4. Bonnet: Screwed.
5. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass or stainless steel.
6. Equal percentage flow characteristic.
B. Pressure-Independent Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150):
1. Globe Style: Single port.

2. Body: Cast iron.
3. End Connections: Flanged.
4. Bonnet: Bolted.
5. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage for coils application and Linear for bypass control
valves.
1.4 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Description:
1. Body: Brass or stainless steel.

2. Seats and Discs: NBR or PTFE.
1.5 SELF-CONTAINED TEMPERATURE REGULATING VALVE
A. Description:
1. Self-contained and self-operated temperature regulating valve.

2. Body: Carbon steel.
3. Trim and Seats: Stainless steel.
4. Yoke: Cast iron.
CONTROL VALVES 230923.11

5. Actuator: Stainless steel.

6. Capillary, Bulb, and Armor: Stainless steel.
7. Thermowell: Stainless steel.
8. Flow Control: From 5 to 100 percent of rated capacity.
1.6 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.
B. Voltage: 24-V ac.
C. Field adjustable.
D. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.
E. Modulating Actuators:
1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either
direction from any point in range.
2. Control Input Signal:
a. Three point, tristate, or floating point.

b. Proportional.
c. Pulse width modulation (PWM).
d. Programmable multi-function.
F. Position Feedback:
1. Two-position actuators with remote monitoring.

2. Modulating actuators with remote monitoring.
G. Fail-safe.
H. Integral overload protection.
I. Valve attachment.
J. Stroke Time: Fully closed to fully open within 60 seconds.
K. Sound:
1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.
CONTROL VALVES 230923.11

SECTION 230923.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS
1.2 RECTANGULAR CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Airfoil Blades:
1. Performance:
a. Leakage: 3 cfm/sq. ft. (15.2 L/s per sq. m) against 1-in. wg (250-Pa) differential
static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.05-in. wg (12.5 Pa) at 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) across a 24-by-24-inch
(600-by-600-mm) damper.
c. Velocity: Up to 6000 fpm (30 m/s).
d. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
2. Construction:
a. Frame and Blades: Extruded aluminum.

b. Blade Seal: Extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.
c. Jamb Seal: Stainless steel, compression type.
d. Axles: Plated or stainless steel.
e. Bearings: Molded synthetic or stainless steel.
f. Linkage: Aluminum and plated or stainless steel with stainless-steel hardware.
g. Additional corrosion protection for corrosive environments.
3. Airflow Measurement Accuracy: Within 5 percent of the actual flow rate.

4. Airflow Control:
a. Suitable for 150 to 2000 fpm (0.8 to 10 m/s).

b. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 140 deg F (Minus 40 to
plus 60 deg C).
c. Ambient Operating Humidity Range:5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-
condensing.
B. Rectangular Dampers with Steel Airfoil Blades:
1. Performance:
static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.06-in. wg (15 Pa) at 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) across a 24-by-24-inch
2. Construction:
a. Frame and Blades: Hollow airfoil, galvanized steel.

b. Blade Seal: Extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.
CONTROL DAMPERS 230923.12


e. Bearings: Stainless steel.
f. Linkage: Aluminum and plated or stainless steel with stainless-steel hardware.
g. Additional corrosion protection for corrosive environments.
C. Industrial-Duty Rectangular Dampers with Steel Airfoil Blades:
1. Performance:
static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.06-in. wg (15 Pa) at 2000 fpm (10 m/s) across a 48-by-48-inch
2. Construction:
a. Frame: Galvanized or stainless steel.

b. Blades: Hollow, airfoil, galvanized or stainless steel.
c. Blade Seal: EPDM or extruded silicone.
d. Jamb Seal: Stainless steel, double compression type.
e. Axles: Plated or stainless steel.
f. Bearings: Stainless steel.
g. Linkage: Plated or stainless steel with stainless-steel hardware.
D. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Flat Blades:
1. Performance:
a. Leakage: 3.2 cfm/sq. ft. (16.2 L/s per sq. m) against 1-in. wg (250-Pa) differential
static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.07-in. wg (17.5 Pa) at 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) across a 24-by-24-inch
2. Construction:

b. Blade Seal: Extruded silicone, vinyl or plastic composite.
e. Linkage: Plated or stainless steel.
f. Additional corrosion protection for corrosive environments.
E. Rectangular Dampers with Steel Flat Blades:
1. Performance:
a. Leakage: 4.8 cfm/sq. ft. (24.3 L/s per sq. m) against 1-in. wg (250-Pa) differential
static pressure.
c. Velocity: Up to 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s).
2. Construction:

a. Frame and Blades: Galvanized or stainless steel.

b. Blade Seal: PVC-coated polyester.
e. Linkage: Plated or stainless steel.
F. Insulated Rectangular Dampers:
1. Performance:
static pressure and 4.9 cfm/sq. ft. (25 L/s per sq. m) against 4-in. wg (1000-Pa)
differential static pressure at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
2. Construction:

b. Seals: Flexible silicone.
c. Axles: Plated or stainless steel.
d. Bearings: Celcon inner bearing fixed to axle, polycarbonate outer bearing inserted
in the frame.
e. Linkage: Aluminum and plated or stainless steel.
f. Additional corrosion protection for corrosive environments.
1.3 ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Round Dampers, Sleeve Type:
1. Performance:
a. Leakage: 0.15 cfm/in. (0.0028 L/s per mm) of perimeter blade at 4-in. wg (1000-Pa)
differential static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.02-in. wg (5 Pa) at 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) across a 12-inch (300-mm)
damper.
e. Pressure Rating: 8-in. wg (2000 Pa) for sizes through 12 inches (300 mm), 6-in. wg
(1500 Pa) for larger sizes.
2. Construction:
a. Frame and Blades: Galvanized or stainless steel, with double-thick blades.

b. Blade Seal: Polyethylene foam.
c. Axle: Plated or stainless steel.
d. Bearings: Stainless steel.
B. Round Dampers, Flanged Type:
1. Performance:
a. Leakage: 0.15 cfm/in. (0.0028 L/s per mm) of perimeter blade at 4-in. wg (1000-Pa)
differential static pressure.
b. Pressure Drop: 0.03-in. wg (7.5 Pa) at 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) across a 12-inch (300-
mm) damper.

e. Pressure Rating: 8-in. wg (2000 Pa) for sizes through 36 inches (900 mm) in
diameter, 6-in. wg (1500 Pa) for larger sizes.
2. Construction:
a. Frame and Blades: Galvanized or stainless steel

b. Blade Stop: Full circumference, located in airstream; galvanized or stainless steel
bar.
c. Blade Seal: Neoprene.
d. Axle: Plated or stainless steel.
e. Bearings: Stainless steel.
1.4 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS
A. Type: Motor operated, electric and electronic.
B. Voltage: 24 V or 120 V.
C. Field adjustable.
D. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.
E. Modulating Actuators: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either
direction from any point in range.
F. Position Feedback:
1. Two-position actuators with remote monitoring.

2. Modulating actuators with remote monitoring.
3. Position indicator and graduated scale.
G. Fail-safe.
H. Integral overload protection.
I. Stroke Time:
1. Fully closed to fully open within 60 seconds.
J. Sound:
1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

SECTION 230923.13 - ENERGY METERS
1.2 THERMAL ENERGY METERS
A. Insertion-Type Thermal Energy Meters:
1. Supply and return temperature sensors, flow sensor, digital display, keypad user interface,
installation hardware, color-coded interconnecting cabling, and installation instructions.
2. Alphanumeric Display:
a. Total energy consumption.

b. Energy rate.
c. Flow rate.
d. Supply temperature.
e. Return temperature.
3. Visual indication of power status (on/off) on face of enclosure.

4. Serial communication interface.
5. Temperature Sensors: Accuracy within 0.15 deg F (0.08 deg C) over the calibrated range
with stainless-steel thermowell.
6. Flow Sensor:
a. Operating Pressure: 200 psig (1378 kPa).

b. Sensor Accuracy:
1) Within 1 percent of actual flow between the flow velocity range of 3 to 30

fps (0.9 to 9 m/s).
2) Within 2 percent of actual flow between the flow velocity range of 0.4 to 20
fps (0.1 to 6.1 m/s).
3) Within 0.5 percent of actual reading at the calibrated velocity.
7. Field Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz.

8. Internal Power: As required by flow meter.
B. In-Line, Compact-Type Thermal Energy Meters:
1. Supply and return temperature sensors, flow sensor, digital display, operator interface,
installation hardware, interconnecting cabling, and installation instructions.
2. Alphanumeric Display:
a. Total energy consumption.

b. Energy rate.
c. Flow rate.
d. Supply temperature.
e. Return temperature.
3. Diagnostic Lights:
a. Red LED labeled "BTU" flashes as energy is transferred.
ENERGY METERS 230923.13

b. Red LED labeled "FLOW" flashes proportional to the liquid flow rate.
c. An unlit LED indicates no flow signal.
4. Serial communication interface.

5. Flow Sensor:
a. Ambient Temperature: 40 to 120 deg F (4 to 49 deg C).

b. Process Temperature: 32 to 200 deg F (0 to 93 deg C).
c. Maximum Process Pressure: 400 psig (2758 kPa).
d. Pressure Drop: 3 psig (20 kPa) at 38 gpm (2.4 L/s).
e. Accuracy:
1) Within 1 percent of actual flow over range of 5.7 to 38 gpm (0.4 to 2.4 L/s).
2) Within 2 percent of actual flow over range of 0.8 to 38 gpm (0.05 to 2.4 L/s).
3) Within 0.5 percent of actual reading at the calibrated velocity.
f. Construct flow sensor body of brass.
6. Field Power Supply: 24-V ac, 50 or 60 Hz.
1.3 ELECTRIC POWER METERS
A. Fully Programmable Multifunction Electric Power Meter:
1. Voltage Inputs: Three voltage inputs.

2. Current Inputs: Three 5-A nominal (10-A full-scale) current inputs.
3. Power Supply: 95- to 240-V ac (within 10 percent) at 47 to 440 Hz, 110- to 300-V dc, or
20- to 60-V dc power source; with maximum load of 12 W.
4. On-board I/O.
5. Provisions for future external I/O.
6. Front-panel display.
7. Memory to store setup data, time-stamped event log, and two programmable data recorders.
8. Instrument:
a. Display Web pages.

b. Automatically e-mail alarm notifications or scheduled system status updates.
c. Data logs sent on an event-driven or scheduled basis.
d. Accommodate high-speed Modbus TCP communications when connected to
Ethernet port.
e. Measure and calculate the following information at one-second intervals:
1) Voltage line-to-neutral and line-to-line for each phase and average of all
three phases.
2) Percent voltage unbalance.
3) Current for each phase and average of three phases.
4) Percent current unbalance.
5) kW for each phase and total of three phases.
6) kVAR for each phase and total of three phases.
7) kVA for each phase and total of three phases.
8) kWh for total of three phases.
9) kVARh for total of three phases.
10) kVAh for total of three phases.
11) Power factor for each phase and total of three phases.
12) Frequency.
13) Harmonic distortion.
14) K-Factor calculations of the first 15 harmonics for all current inputs.
9. Operator interface features as follows:

a. Thermal demand calculations for any parameter.

b. Sliding window demands for any parameter.
c. Predicted Demand calculations of sliding window demand parameters.
d. Minimum value for any measured parameter.
e. Maximum value for any measured parameter.
f. Derived values for any combination of measured or calculated parameter.
g. Support direct display of all parameters on the front panel or remote display in user-
programmable groups, using plain language labels. Simultaneous access to all
parameters available through any communication port.
h. Field programmable.
i. Periodic or non-periodic schedules for up to two years.
j. Alarming and set-point control.
B. Multifunction Electric Power Meter:
1. Voltage Inputs: Three voltage inputs.

2. Current Inputs: Three 5-A nominal (6-A full-scale) current inputs.
3. Power Supply: 100- to 240-V ac (within 10 percent) at 50 to 60 Hz, 110- to 300-V dc, or
20- to 60-V dc power source; with maximum load of 15 W.
4. Onboard I/O.
5. Memory: Store setup data and accumulated energy values.
6. Instrument:
a. Voltage line-to-neutral and line-to-line for each phase and average of three phases.
b. Current for each phase and average of three phases.
c. Peak current demand.
d. Neutral current.
e. Power (kW).
f. Peak power demand (kW).
g. Energy (kWh) import/export.
h. Power factor total.
i. Frequency.
7. Field Programmable Operator Interface:
a. Basic parameters.
b. Customized configurations of all operating parameters.
c. User ID and password.
d. Programming through the front panel is secured by password.
e. Digital outputs support pulse output relay operation for kWh total, kWh imported,
kWh exported, kVARh total, kVARh imported, kVARh exported, and kVAh values.

SECTION 230923.14 - FLOW INSTRUMENTS
1.2 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATIONS AND SENSORS
A. Pitot-Tube Airflow Sensor Station: Multiple total- and static-pressure sensors.
B. Copper or Anodized Aluminum Pitot-Tube Fan Inlet Airflow Traverse Sensor: Traverse manifold
for mounting in fan inlets.
C. Stainless-Steel Pitot-Tube Fan Inlet Airflow Traverse Sensor: Traverse manifold for mounting in
fan inlets.
D. Piezometer Ring Fan Inlet Airflow Sensor: Integral to fan inlet cones with multiple pressure
sensor points.
E. Thermal Airflow Measurement Stations: One or more sensor probes and a remotely mounted
microprocessor-based transmitter.
1.3 AIRFLOW SWITCHES
A. Polymer Film Sail Switch: Polyester film sail encasing a wire frame.
B. Stainless-steel single vane switch.
1.4 AIRFLOW TRANSMITTERS
A. Airflow transmitter with 0.10 percent accuracy and auto-zero feature.
1. Accuracy: Within 0.10 percent of natural span.

2. Repeatability: Within 0.15 percent of calibrated span.
3. Linearity: Within 0.2 percent of calibrated span.
4. Hysteresis and Deadband (Combined): Less than 0.2 percent of calibrated span.
5. Integral digital LED or digital display.
B. Airflow transmitters with 0.25 percent accuracy and auto-zero feature.
1. Calibrated Span: Field adjustable, minus 40 percent of the range.

6. Integral digital display.
C. Pressure differential transmitters for airflow measurement.
1. Accuracy: Within 1 percent of the full-scale range.

2. Hysteresis: Within 0.10 percent of full scale.
FLOW INSTRUMENTS 230923.14

3. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of full scale.

4. Stability: Within 1 percent of span per year.
5. Overpressure: 10 psig (69 kPa).
6. Temperature Limits: Zero to 150 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 66 deg C).
7. Compensate Temperature Limits: 40 to 150 deg F (4 to 66 deg C).
8. Thermal Effects: 0.033 percent of full scale per degree F.
9. Shock and vibration resistant.
10. Display: Four-digit digital with minimum 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high numeric characters.
11. Operator Interface: Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.
D. Pressure differential indicating transmitter, switch, and controller for airflow measurement.
1. Accuracy including hysteresis and repeatability:
a. Ranges Less than 5-Inch wg (1250 Pa): Within 1 percent.

b. Other Ranges: Within 0.5 percent at 77 deg F (25 deg C).
2. Stability: Within 1 percent per year.

3. Response Time: 250 ms.
4. Overpressure:
a. Ranges Less than 50-Inch wg (12.5 kPa): 5 psi (34.5 kPa).

b. Range of 100-Inch wg (25 kPa): 9 psi (62 kPa).
5. Temperature Limits: 32 to 140 deg F (Zero to 60 deg C).

6. Thermal Effects: 0.020 percent per deg F (deg C).
7. Warm-up Period: One hour.
8. Display: Four-digit digital, with minimum 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high alphanumeric
characters.
9. Display: Two LEDs for set point and two LEDs for alarm status.
10. Operator Interface:
a. Set-point adjustment through keypad on face of instrument.

b. Zero and span adjustments accessible through menu.
c. Programming through keypad.
1.5 LIQUID FLOW METERS
A. In-line Body Electromagnetic Flow Meter:
1. Accuracy for Velocities between 3.3 and 33 fps (1 and 10 m/s): Within 0.2 percent of
reading.
2. Accuracy for Velocities between 1.0 and 3.3 fps (0.3 and 1 m/s): Within 0.75 percent of
reading.
3. Accuracy for Velocities Less than 1.0 fps (0.3 m/s): Within 0.0075 fps (0.0023 m/s).
4. Ambient Temperature: Minus 4 to plus 140 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 60 deg C).
5. Process Temperature: Minus 4 to 212 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 100 deg C).
6. Digital Output Signal: M-bus.
a. Keypad.
b. Digital Display: Multiple-line digital display of alphanumerical characters.
c. LED for normal and alarm operation.
1.6 LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES
A. Liquid Flow Switch (Bellows Type): Field-adjustable four-vane combinations or set-point

adjustment screw.

1. Flow Rate Actuation and De-actuation: Varies with vane combination and set-point
adjustment.
2. Pressure Limit: 145 psig (1000 kPa).
3. Temperature Limit: 230 deg F (110 deg C).
4. Electrical Rating: 10 A resistive, 3 A conductive at 250-V ac.
5. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
1.7 LIQUID FLOW TRANSMITTERS
A. Pressure Differential Transmitter with 0.07 Percent Accuracy for Flow Measurement in Hazardous
Environment:
1. Range: Minus 250- to 250-inch wg (Minus 62.5 to 62.5 kPa).

2. Span: Field adjustable.
3. Minimum Span: 2.5-inch wg (500 Pa).
4. Accuracy: Within 0.07 percent of span or better.
5. Stability: Within 0.125 percent of upper range limit for 5 years.
6. Overpressure Limits: 3626 psig (25000 kPa).
7. Process Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
8. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
9. Temperature Effect: Within 0.025 percent of upper range limit plus 0.125 percent of span.
10. Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter.
11. Display: Five-digit, two-line digital display with 0.4 inch (10 mm) high alphanumeric
characters.
12. Five-valve manifold.
B. Liquid Pressure Differential Transmitter for Flow Measurement:
1. Range: Approximately 2 times the set point.

2. Span: Adjustable plus or minus 1 mA, non-interactive.
3. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of full scale.
4. Maximum Operating Pressure: 2.5 times range.
5. Temperature Limits: Zero to 175 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 79 deg C).
6. Compensate Temperature Limits: 30 to 150 deg F (Minus 1 to plus 66 deg C).
8. Response Time: 30 to 50 ms.

SECTION 230923.16 - GAS INSTRUMENTS
1.2 SINGLE-POINT HYDROGEN MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Performance:
1. Range: Full scale, zero to 100 percent LEL.

2. Accuracy / Repeatability: ±3% LEL.
3. Approval: ATEX.
4. Step Change Response Time: Within 30 seconds.
B. Visual Display: Four-digit LED or backlight LCD display visible from front face of enclosure.
C. Audible Alarm: Audible horn when an alarm condition occurs.
D. Operator Interface:
1. Door audible alarm acknowledge switch.

2. Operating Modes and Parameters Selection: Programming and selection via internal push
buttons and jumpers.
E. Output Signal:
1. Relays.
2. Analog Output or Digital Communication.
F. Sensor: Catalytic bead.
G. Installation Height: 0.3m below ceiling level
1.3 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION MONITORING
A. Provide refrigerant leak monitoring system for chillers capable of detecting CFC, HCFC, HFC,
and Ammonia as applicable, meeting at minimum meeting all applicable BSI standards including
BSI standard 97/700630 DC (Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental
requirements. Refrigerant compressors (prEN 12693).
GAS INSTRUMENTS 230923.16

SECTION 230923.17 - LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
1.2 LEVEL SWITCHES
A. Liquid-Level Switch (Magnetic Type with Float): Float arm with hinge design limits vertical
movement to prevent sticking.
1. Level Actuation and De-Actuation: 0.75-inch (20-mm) deadband.

2. Body Pressure Limit: 1000 psig (6895kPa) for brass body; 2000 psig (13790 kPa) for
Type 316 stainless-steel body.
3. Float Pressure Limit: 150 psig (1034 kPa).
4. Temperature Range: Minus 4 to 275 deg F (Minus 20 to 135 deg C).
5. Electrical Rating: 10 A at 125/250-V ac.
B. Electrode-Type Liquid-Level Switches: Conductivity technology, dual-point level settings, and

adjustable sensitivity.

2. Temperature Limit: 212 deg F (100 deg C).
3. Power Supply: 120-V ac, 50 or 60 Hz.
4. Electrical Rating: 5 A at 240-V ac.
C. RF Admittance-Type Liquid-Level Switches: Capacitive technology with eight selectable settings.

2. Ambient Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185 deg F (Minus 40 to 85 deg C).
3. Process Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 250 deg F (Minus 40 to 121 deg C).
4. Universal Power Supply: 12- to 240-V ac and dc.
5. Electrical Rating: 8 A at 120- and 240-V ac.
6. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, selectable for normally open or closed operation.
7. Response Time: 0.2 seconds.
8. Time Delay: Adjustable, zero to 60 seconds.
D. Drain Pan Leak-Detection Float Switches, Inline Type: Float switch for direct mounting onto
primary or secondary drain pan outlet, or for inline mounting in drainline pipe, to detect drain pan
pre-overflow condition and trigger equipment shutdown.
1. Mechanical switch and float valve.

2. Switch cap assembly to be removable to permit access for cleaning and clearing of clogs.
3. Schedule 40 PVC housing.
4. Alarm Action: Equipment shutdown via minimum 72-inch (1.8-m) 18 AWG cables
suitable for 24 VAC Class 2 circuit.
5. Standard: UL 508 listed.
E. Drain Pan Leak-Detection Float Switches, Right-Angle Type: L-shaped float switch for direct
mounting onto secondary drain pan outlet to detect drain pan pre-overflow condition and trigger
equipment shutdown.
LEVEL INSTRUMENTS 230923.17

1. Mechanical switch and float valve.

2. Switch and cap assembly to be removable to permit access for cleaning and clearing of
clogs.
3. Schedule 40 PVC housing.
4. Alarm Action: Equipment shutdown via pre-wired 72-inch (1.8-m) 18 AWG cables
F. Drain Pan Leak-Detection Float Switches, In-Pan Type: Float switch for direct mounting in
primary drain pan to detect drain pan pre-overflow condition and trigger equipment shutdown.
1. Mechanical switch and float valve, in sealed waterproof housing.

2. Corrosion-resistant clip to position and secure float switch to side of drain pan.
3. Alarm Action: Equipment shutdown via pre-wired 72-inch (1.8-m) 18 AWG cables
1.3 LEVEL TRANSMITTERS
A. RF Admittance-Type Liquid-Level Sensor and Transmitter: Electronic unit, sensing element,

connecting cable.
1. Sensor: Stainless steel.

2. Calibrated Range: At least 20 percent beyond high- and low-level set point and alarm
levels.
3. Accuracy: Within 1 percent of calibrated range.
4. Two wire, loop powered.
5. Supply Voltage: 11.5 to 50-V dc.
6. Maximum Load: 625 ohms at 24-V dc.
7. Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA dc.
8. Response Time: 0.5 to 30 seconds, adjustable.
9. Temperature Range: 32 to 165 deg F (0 to 74 deg C).
10. Zero and Span Adjustments: Non-interacting.
11. Visual Indication: Continuous digital display of level.
12. Field-changeable failsafe condition and phasing in event measurement requires changes to
optimize level reading.
13. Free from effects of radio frequency interference.
14. Free from harmful effects of static electricity on sensing element with discharges of up to
10 A without damage.
15. Adjustable time delay (signal dampening).
LEVEL INSTRUMENTS 230923.17

SECTION 230923.18 – LEAK DETECTION INSTRUMENTS
1.2 LEAK-DETECTION SWITCHES
A. Cable-Type, Leak-Detection Switches:
1. Power and alarm LEDs.

2. Alarm test switch.
3. Continuous tape integrity self check.
4. Service: Fuel.
5. Switch Type: DPDT.
6. Field Power: 24-V ac or 24- to 30-V dc.
LEAK DETECTION INSTRUMENTS 230923.18

SECTION 230923.19 - MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS
1.2 MOISTURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS
A. Sensors and Transmitters with Digital Display:
1. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability: Within 2 percent from zero
to 90 percent relative humidity and within 2.5 percent from 90 to 100 percent relative
humidity between 60 to 77 deg F (16 to 25 deg C).
2. Relative Humidity Range: Zero to 100 percent.
3. Factory calibrated and NIST traceable with certificate included.
B. Sensor and Transmitter without Display:
1. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability: Within 2 percent from zero
to 90 percent relative humidity and within 3 percent from 90 to 95 percent relative
humidity at 68 deg F (20 deg C).
2. Relative Humidity Range:
a. Duct: Zero to 100 percent.

b. Space: Zero to 95 percent relative.
3. Factory calibrated and NIST traceable with certificate included.
C. Sensor and Transmitter without Display:
1. Relative Humidity Range: Zero to 100 percent.

2. Accuracy: Within 3 percent.
3. Operating Temperatures: Minus 30 to 130 deg F (Minus 1 to 54 deg C).
4. Hysteresis: Within 1 percent.
D. Combination Humidity and Temperature Sensor and Transmitter with Display: Digital display,
keypad user interface, installation hardware, interconnecting sensor cabling, installation
instructions, and operating manual.
1. Alphanumeric display of the following on the face of the enclosure:
a. Percent relative humidity.

b. Absolute humidity.
c. Mixing ratio.
d. Dry-bulb temperature.
e. Wet-bulb temperature.
f. Dew point temperature.
g. Enthalpy.
2. Visual display of measurement trends, and minimum and maximum values over a one-year
period.
3. Three Analog Outputs: 4 to 20 mA or zero to 10-V dc for each output.
MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.19

4. Temperature Sensor:
a. Minus 40 to 140 deg F (Minus 40 to 60 deg C).

b. Within 0.5 deg F (0.3 deg C) accuracy over 50 to 100 deg F (10 to 38 deg C) and
within 1 deg F (0.6 deg C) over the remainder of the range.
5. Humidity Sensor:
a. Zero to 100 percent.

b. Response time in still air within 40 seconds.
c. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability:
1) For Temperature Between 59 and 77 Deg F (15 to 25 Deg C) and Relative

Humidity between Zero and 90 Percent: Within 1 percent.
2) For Temperature between 59 and 77 Deg F (15 to 25 Deg C) and Relative
Humidity between 90 and 100 Percent: Within 1.7 percent.
3) For Temperature between Minus 4 and 104 Deg F (Minus 20 to 40 Deg C):
Within 1 percent plus 0.008 times relative humidity reading.
4) For Temperature between Minus 40 and 356 Deg F (Minus 40 to 180
Deg C): Within 1.5 percent plus 0.015 times the relative humidity reading.
MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.19

SECTION 230923.21 - MOTION INSTRUMENTS
1.2 INDOOR MOTION SENSORS
A. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing heat and movement.
B. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing reflected ultrasonic energy.
C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection.
1.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED MOTION SENSORS
A. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a
minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m)
2. Ambient-light override.
3. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
4. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry.
B. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2:
1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84
sq. m).
2. Sensing Technology: PIR.
3. Ambient-light override.
4. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.
5. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry.
MOTION INSTRUMENTS 230923.21

SECTION 230923.22 - POSITION INSTRUMENTS
1.2 POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES
A. Description: Type of actuating head (plunger, roller lever, or rod) to suit application.
1. Life expectancy: 30 million mechanical operations and 750,000 electrical operations.

2. Operating Frequency: 300 mechanical operations per minute and 30 electrical operations
per minute.
3. Voltage: 125-, 250-, 480-, and 600-V ac or 8-, 12-, 14-, 24-, 30-, 48-, 125-, and 250-V dc,
as required by application.
4. Temperature Rise: 50 deg C.
5. Ambient Temperature: 14 to 175 deg F (Minus 10 to 79 deg C).
6. Ambient Relative Humidity: 35 to 95 percent.
POSITION INSTRUMENTS 230923.22

SECTION 230923.23 - PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
1.2 AIR-PRESSURE SENSORS
A. Duct Insertion Static Pressure Sensor: Four radial holes of 0.04-inch (1-mm) diameter.
1. Brass or stainless-steel construction.

2. Suitable for flat oval, rectangular, and round duct configurations.
B. Duct Insertion Static Pressure Sensor: Probe with two opposing orifices designed to reduce error-
associated air velocity.
1. Sensor made of aluminum alloy or stainless steel.

2. Mounting flange suitable for flat oval, rectangular, and round duct configurations.
3. Pressure Rating: 10 psig (69 kPa).
C. Duct Traverse Static Pressure Sensor: At least one pickup point every 6 inches (150mm) along
length of sensor.
1. Sensor made of 18-gage extruded and anodized aluminum.

2. Accuracy within 1 percent of actual operating static pressure.
3. Suitable for velocities of 100 to 10000 fpm (0.51 to 51 m/s) and temperatures of up to 200
deg F (93 deg C).
4. Sensor air resistance less than 0.1 times the velocity pressure at probe-operating velocity.
5. Suitable for flat oval, rectangular, and round duct configurations.
1.3 AIR-PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. Air-Pressure Differential Switch: Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT snap switch.
1. Fan safety shutdown applications: Switch with manual reset.
B. Air-Pressure Differential Switch with Set-Point Indicator: Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT
snap switch.
C. Air-Pressure Differential Switch with Dual Scale Adjustable Set Point: Diaphragm operated to
actuate an SPDT snap switch.
D. Air-Pressure Differential Indicating Switch: Combination gage with low- and high-limit switches.
1.4 AIR-PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A. Air-Pressure Differential Transmitter:
1. Range: Approximately 2 times set point.

2. Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent of the span at reference temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.23

3. Hysteresis: Within 0.02 percent of the span.

4. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of the calibrated span.
5. Stability: Within 0.25 percent of span per year.
6. Overpressure: 15 psig (103 kPa).
7. Temperature Limits: Minus 20 to 160 deg F (Minus 29 to 71 deg C).
8. Compensate Temperature Limits: 35 to 135 deg F (2 to 57 deg C).
10. Warm-up Time: Within 5 seconds.
11. Response Time: One second.
a. Zero and span adjustments within 10 percent of full span.

b. Potentiometer adjustments located on face of transmitter.
B. Air-Pressure Differential Indicating Transmitter:

2. Accuracy Including Hysteresis and Repeatability: Within 0.25 percent of full scale.
3. Stability: Within 1 percent of full scale per year.
4. Overpressure: Varies with range. At least 1.5 times range.
5. Temperature Limits: Zero to 140 deg F (Minus 18 to 60 deg C).
6. Compensate Temperature Limits: 20 to 120 deg F (Minus 7 to 49 deg C).
8. Display: Digital with minimum 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high numeric characters.
9. Operator Interface: Zero and span adjustments.
C. Air-Pressure Differential Indicating Transmitter with Field-Selectable Features:
1. Field-Selectable Features:
2. Accuracy Including Hysteresis and Repeatability:
a. Within 2 percent for 0.10 in. wg (25 Pa), 1.0 in. wg (250 Pa) and all bi-directional
ranges.
b. Within 1 percent for other ranges.
3. Stability: Within 1 percent of full scale per year.

4. Response Time: Adjustable 0.5- to 15-second time constant with 95 percent response
within 1.5 to 45 seconds.
5. Overpressure: 1 psig (6.9 kPa) maximum operating; 10 psig (69 kPa) burst pressure.
7. Display: Four-digit digital display with minimum 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high numeric
characters.
a. Selectable pressure ranges, where indicated.

b. Zero and span adjustments.
c. Selectable air velocity mode with square root function.
d. Adjustable signal dampening.
D. Air-Pressure Differential Transmitter with 0.10 Percent Accuracy and Auto Zero Feature:

7. Integral digital display for continuous indication of pressure differential.

E. Air-Pressure Differential Transmitter with 0.25 Percent Accuracy and Auto Zero Feature:
1. Range: As required by application and at least 10 percent below minimum airflow and 10
percent greater than design airflow.
7. Integral digital display for continuous indication of pressure differential.
F. Air-Pressure Differential Indicating Transmitter, Switch and Controller:
1. Accuracy Including Hysteresis and Repeatability:
a. Within 1 percent for ranges less than 5 in. wg (1250 Pa).

b. Within 0.5 percent at 77 deg F (25 deg C) for other ranges.
2. Stability: Within 1 percent per year.

3. Response Time: 250 ms.
4. Overpressure: 5 psig (34 kPa) for instrument ranges less than 50 in wg (12.5 kPa) and 9
psig (62 kPa) for 100 in. wg (25 kPa) range.
5. Temperature Limits: 32 to 140 deg F (Zero to 60 deg C).
6. Thermal Effects: 0.020 percent per degree F.
7. Warm-up Period: One hour.
8. Controller programming through menu keys.
9. Display:
a. Digital, four-digit display with backlight, with 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high

alphanumeric characters.
b. Four indicators; two for set point and two for alarm status.
a. Set-point adjustment through keypad on face of instrument.

b. Zero and span adjustments accessible through menu.
c. Programming through keypad.
1.5 LIQUID-PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. Liquid Gage Pressure Switch, Diaphragm Operated, Low Pressure:
1. Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT snap switch.

2. User Interface: External screw with visual set-point adjustment.
3. Operating Data:
a. Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120-V ac.

b. Pressure Limits:
1) Range 1 to 30 psig (7 to 207 kPa): 60 psig (414 kPa).

2) Range 10 to 125 psig (69 to 862 kPa): 160 psig (1103 kPa).
c. Temperature Limits: Minus 30 to 150 deg F (Minus 35 to 66 deg C).

d. Operating Range: [1 to 30 psig (7 to 207 kPa)] [10 to 250 psig (69 to 862 kPa)].
e. Deadband: Fixed.
B. Liquid Gage Pressure Switch-Diaphragm Operated:

1. Diaphragm operated to actuate a snap switch.

2. User Interface: Internal hex nut set-point adjustment with enclosed set-point indicator and
scale.
a. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
3. Operating Data:
a. Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120-, 240-, and 480-V ac.

b. Pressure Limits: 1200 psig (8274 kPa).
c. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 30 to 180 deg F (Minus 35 to 82 deg C).
d. Process Temperature Limits: Minus 4 to 167 deg F (Minus 20 to 75 deg C).
e. Adjustable Operating Range.
f. Deadband: Adjustable.
C. Liquid Gage Pressure Switch-Bourdon Tube Operated:
1. Bourdon tube operated to actuate a snap switch.

2. Provide switches used in safety limiting applications with reset.
3. Wetted Materials: Brass or stainless steel.
4. User Interface: Thumbscrew set-point adjustment with enclosed set-point indicator and
scale.
D. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switch with Set-Point Indicator:
1. Brass stainless-steel double opposing bellows operate to actuate a SPDT snap switch.
2. Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
3. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.
scale.
5. High and Low Process Connections: Threaded, NPS 1/8 (DN 3).
E. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switch:
1. Type 316 stainless-steel double opposing bellows operate to actuate an SPDT snap switch.
2. Wetted materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Seal: as required by the application
scale.
5. High and Low Process Connections: Threaded, NPS 1/4 (DN 10).
1.6 LIQUID-PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A. Liquid Gage Pressure Transmitter with Adjustable Span for Hazardous Environments:
1. Range: Minus 300 to 300 psig (Minus 2068 to 2068 kPa).

3. Minimum Span: 3psig (21 kPa).
4. Reference Accuracy: Within 0.07 percent of span or better.
6. Overpressure Limits: 3626 psig (25 000 kPa).
7. Process Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 250 deg F (Minus 40 to 121 deg C).
8. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 185 deg F (Minus 40 to 85 deg C).
12. Display: Digital, five-digit, two-line display with 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high alphanumeric
characters.

B. Liquid-Pressure Differential Transmitter with Adjustable Span for Hazardous Environments:
1. Range: Minus 300 to 300 psig (Minus 2068 to 2068 kPa).

3. Minimum Span: 3psig (21 kPa).
4. Reference Accuracy: Within 0.07 percent of span or better.
6. Overpressure Limits: 3626 psig (25 000 kPa).
7. Process Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 250 deg F (Minus 40 to 121 deg C).
8. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 185 deg F (Minus 40 to 85 deg C).
12. Display: Digital, five-digit, two-line display with 0.4-inch- (10-mm-) high alphanumeric
characters.
C. Liquid-Pressure Differential Transmitter:
1. Range: Approximately 2 times the set point.

2. Span: Adjustable plus or minus one milliamp, noninteractive.
3. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of full scale.
4. Hysteresis: Within 0.1 percent of full scale.
5. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of full scale.
6. Maximum Working Pressure: 250 psig (1724 kPa).
8. Compensate Temperature Limits: 30 to 150 deg F (Minus 1 to 66 deg C).
10. Response Time: 30 to 50 ms.
a. Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

b. Bleed screws on side of body, two screws on low-pressure side, and one screw on
high-pressure side, for air in line and pressure cavity.
13. Three-valve manifold. Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
D. Liquid-Pressure Differential Transmitter with Field-Selectable Ranges:
1. Field-Selectable Ranges.
2. Accuracy: Within 1 percent of the full-scale range.

3. Static Pressure: 2 times full-scale range.
4. Overpressure: Proof pressure 3 times full-scale range, burst pressure 5 times full scale.
5. Compensate Temperature Limits: Zero to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to 82 deg C).
a. Zero button located behind cover.

b. Range selector located behind cover.
9. Three-valve stainless steel manifold.

SECTION 230923.27 - TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
1.2 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Platinum RTD, Single-Point Air Temperature Duct Sensors:
1. 100 or 1000 ohms.

3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.
B. Platinum RTD, Air Temperature Averaging Sensors:
1. 100 or 1000 ohms.

3. Multiple sensors to provide average temperature across entire length of sensor.
4. Rigid probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless-steel sheath.
5. Flexible probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless-steel sheath and formable to a 4-
inch (100-mm) radius.
C. Platinum RTD Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors:
1. 100 or 1000 ohms.

3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.
4. Solar Shield: Stainless steel.
D. Platinum RTD Space Air Temperature Sensors:
1. 100 or 1000 ohms.

3. Sensor assembly shall include a temperature-sensing element mounted under a bright
white, non-yellowing cover.
1.3 COMBINATION AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND SWITCH
A. Air Temperature Switch:
1. Factory preset set point of 38 deg F (3 deg C). Field-adjustable set point from 30 to 44
deg F (minus 1 to 7 deg C).
2. Responsive to coldest 12-inch (300-mm) section of sensor length.
3. DPST latching relay rated at 25 A and 120-V ac, with powered controller, coil, and manual
rest at panel.
B. Air Temperature Sensor:
1. Temperature-averaging type over sensor length.
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.27

2. Platinum RTD with a value of 1000 ohms at zero deg C and a temperature coefficient of
0.00385 ohm/ohm/deg C.
3. Accuracy: Within 0.9 deg F (0.5 deg C).
1.4 AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
A. Thermostat and Switch for Low Temperature Control in Duct Applications:
1. Two-position control.
2. Field-adjustable set point.
3. Manual reset.
4. Operating Temperature Range: 15 to 55 deg F (Minus 9 to 13 deg C).
5. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F (2.8 deg C), non-adjustable and additive.
6. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: Minus 20 to 140 deg F (Minus 11 to 60 deg C).
7. Sensing Element Maximum Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).
8. Voltage: 120-V ac.
9. Current: 16 FLA.
10. Switch Type: Two SPDT snap switches operate on coldest 12-inch (300-mm)section along
element length.
B. Thermostat and Switch for High Temperature Control in Duct Applications:
3. Manual reset.
4. Temperature Range: 100 to 160 deg F (38 to 71 deg C).
5. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F (2.8 deg C).
6. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 260 deg F (Minus 18 to 127 deg C).
8. Current: 16 FLA.
1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE RTD TRANSMITTERS
A. Functional Characteristics:
1. 100-ohm platinum RTD temperature coefficient of 0.00385 ohm/ohm/deg C, two-wire

sensors.
2. 1000-ohm platinum RTD temperature coefficient of 0.00385 ohm/ohm/deg C, two-wire
sensors.
3. Span (Adjustable):
a. Space: 40 to 90 deg F (4 to 32 deg C).

b. Supply Air Cooling and Heating: 40 to 120 deg F (4 to 49 deg C).
c. Supply Air Cooling Only: 40 to 90 deg F (4 to 32 deg C).
d. Supply Air Heating Only: 40 to 120 deg F (4 to 49 deg C).
e. Exhaust Air: 50 to 100 deg F (10 to 38 deg C).
f. Return Air: 50 to 100 deg F (10 to 38 deg C).
g. Mixed Air: Minus 40 to 140 deg F (Minus 40 to 60 deg C).
h. Outdoor: Minus 40 to 140 deg F (Minus 40 to 60 deg C).
4. Calibration Accuracy: Within 0.1 percent of the span.

5. Stability: Within 0.2 percent of the span for at least 6 months.
6. Combined Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent.

1.6 LIQUID AND STEAM TEMPERATURE SENSORS, INDUSTRIAL GRADE
A. RTD:
1. Resistance temperature sensors shall comply with IEC 60751, Class A requirements.
2. Platinum with a value of 100 ohms at zero deg C and a temperature coefficient of 0.00385
ohm/ohm/deg C.
3. Encase RTD in a stainless-steel sheath with a 0.25-inch (8-mm) OD.
4. Four-wire, PTFE-insulated, nickel-coated, 22-gage, stranded copper leads.
5. Spring-loaded RTDs for thermowell installations.
6. Range: Minus 328 to 932 deg F (Minus 200 to 500 deg C).
7. Interchangeable Accuracy: Within 0.27 deg F (0.15 deg C) at 32 deg F (zero deg C).
8. Stability: Within 0.05 percent maximum ice-point resistance shift after 1000 hours at 752
deg F (400 deg C).
9. Hysteresis: Within 0.04 percent of range.
10. Response Time: 62.8 percent of change in 4 seconds with water flowing across sensor at 3
fps (0.9 m/s).
11. Self-Heating: 18-mW minimum power dissipation required to cause a 1.8 deg F (1 deg C)
temperature measurement error in water flowing at 3 fps (0.9 m/s).
B. Thermowells:
1. Stem: Straight or stepped or tapered shank formed from solid bar stock.
2. Material: stainless steel.
C. Connection Heads:
1. Housing: Low-copper cast-aluminum alloy, complying with NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Terminals: Six or eight as required by sensor, nickel-plated brass.
1.7 LIQUID TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
A. Thermostat and Switch for Temperature Control in Pipe Applications:
3. Manual reset.
4. Operating Temperature Range: 65 to 200 deg F (18 to 3 deg C).
5. Temperature Differential Deadband: 5 to 30 deg F (3 to 17 deg C), adjustable.
6. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: 150 deg F (66 deg C).
7. Sensing Element Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1379 kPa).
9. Current: 8 FLA.
1.8 LIQUID AND STEAM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS, INDUSTRIAL GRADE
A. Digital Accuracy: Within 0.27 deg F (0.15 deg C) with a 180 deg F (82 deg C) span.
B. Digital to Analog Accuracy: Within 0.03 percent of span.
C. Total Accuracy: Within 0.32 deg F (0.18 deg C) with a 180 deg F (82 deg C) span.
D. Stability: Within 0.15 percent of output reading for 24 months.
E. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 4 to 185 deg F (Minus 20 to 85 deg C).

F. Humidity Limits: Zero to 99 percent.
G. Input: 100-ohm platinum RTD temperature coefficient of 0.00385 ohm/ohm/deg C.
H. Range: Minus 328 to 1562 deg F (Minus 200 to 850 deg C).
I. Field-Adjustable Span: 18 deg F (10 deg C) minimum.
J. Default Spans:
1. Chilled Water: Zero to 100 deg F (Minus 18 to 38 deg C).

2. Condenser Water: Zero to 120 deg F (Minus 18 to 49 deg C).
3. Heating Hot Water: 32 to 212 deg F (Zero to 100 deg C).
4. Heat Recovery: Zero to 120 deg F (Minus 18 to 49 deg C).
5. Self-Calibration: The analog-to-digital measurement circuitry automatically self-calibrates
for each temperature update by comparing the dynamic measurement to extremely stable
and accurate internal reference elements.

SECTION 231113 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
for facility fuel oil piping, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501,
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.
D. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
E. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
A. Maximum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 3 psig (21 kPa).
B. Quality Standards:
1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping materials, installation, testing,
and inspecting.
2. UL 842 for fuel-oil valves, with "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
1.4 MATERIALS
A. Piping Specialties:
1. Metallic flexible connectors.

2. Y-pattern strainers.
3. Manual air vents.
B. Manual Fuel-Oil Shutoff Valves:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

2. Two-piece, regular full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
C. Specialty Valves:
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 231113

1. Pressure relief valves.

2. Oil safety valves.
3. Emergency shutoff valves.
4. Mechanical leak detector.
D. Leak-Detection and Monitoring System: Cable sensor with probes and annunciator panel.
E. Fuel Oil:
1. Grade No. 2.
F. Labeling and Identifying: Detectable warning tape buried above tank and piping.
1.5 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground Fuel-Oil Piping: Rigid double-containment piping.
B. Underground Fuel-Oil-Tank Fill and Vent Piping: Steel, with protective coating where
underground.
C. Containment Conduit: Steel with welded joints and protective coating.
D. Aboveground Fuel-Oil and Vent Piping:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe with welded joints
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded joints
1.6 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Steel pipe with threaded joints
B. NPS 5/8 to NPS 2 (DN 18 to DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe with welded joints
C. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded joints
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 231113

SECTION 231213 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PUMPS
for fuel oil pumps, as listed in, but not limited to the ”Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Multiplex Fuel-Oil Transfer Pump Sets: Packaged unit, skid mounted, with positive-displacement,
rotary gear type, with direct, close-coupled drive and interface controller with HVAC controls.
Comply with HI M109.
B. Fuel Maintenance System: Fuel-oil filtration with enclosure, filter, fuel-oil pump, multiple-tank
manifold, programmable logic controller, and controls.
1. Interface controller with HVAC controls.
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PUMPS 231213

SECTION 231313 - FACILITY UNDERGROUND FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANKS
for underground fuel storage tanks, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code”
C. Installer Qualifications: FRP tanks; trained and certified by the tank manufacturer.
D. Underground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and
local authorities having jurisdiction, including recording fuel-oil storage tanks.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: 30 years.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. FRP Fuel-Oil UST: Double wall, with integral hydrostatic, leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Fuel-Oil UST Accessories:
1. Tank manholes.
2. Steel tank masonry supports.
3. Ladders.
4. Threaded pipe connections.
5. Striker plates
6. Lifting lugs.
7. Supply tube.
8. Sounding and gage tubes.
9. Containment sumps.
10. Sump entry boots.
11. Anchor straps.
12. Filter mat.
13. Overfill prevention valves.
FACILITY UNDERGROUND FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANKS 231313

C. Liquid-level gage systems with floats or other sensors and remote annunciator panel.
D. Leak-Detection and Monitoring System: Cable and sensor with probes or other sensors and remote
annunciator panel.
E. Fuel Oil:
1. Grade No. 2.
F. Precast concrete manholes with cast-iron frame and cover.
FACILITY UNDERGROUND FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANKS 231313

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
1.2 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative equivalent standards to those
specified in this section:
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are made on threads
(metric dimensions).
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical delivery
conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use and
without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non alloy and ferritic alloy steels with
specific inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
8. API American Petroleum Institute.
9. Or other equivalent relevant EN standards.
A. Retain option below if section 1.4 is retained or if required for special projects Surface
preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate application of 150 µm
polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding with pre-insulated pipes manufacturer
, and the contractor shall employ a certified painting inspector to be responsible.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" and ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as
applicable. Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material specified, welding process and
position of welds required during fabrication of the piping. Welder’s Qualification Test to be
performed on site and attended by Contractor Welding Inspectors, Third Party and Engineer prior
to commencing piping fabrication.
C. Non destructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds in accordance to ASME B31.1
or ASTM B31.9 as applicable. A Non destructive test shall perform the tests and submit the related
reports after getting the approval and stamping of third party inspection company, prior
prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer on NDT & Third Party Inspection
both companies.
D. All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The Contractor shall
employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1, NDT personal certified as Level 2
minimum in the NDE methods utilized (independent of the contractor fabricating or installing the
piping) to visually examine all welds in accordance with inspection and examination requirements
of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable. Any welds failing the visual or NDE inspection
shall be ground out or cutout, re-welded and radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. The
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113

CWI shall submit a written report signed and stamped from the approved third party for each weld
to the Engineer.
E. Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per ASME
requirements, minimum of 5% of Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer, shall be
radio graphed at the expense of the contractor. The certified welding inspector shall examine the
films and provide a written report to the Engineer. All welds not meeting the requirements of
ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 latest edition as applicable will be ground out, re-welded and re-
radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. If any 10% of the randomly selected radio graphed
welds fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and repaired at the expense of the
contractor.
F. High rejection rate welders (with rejection rate of 25%or more) will be revoked from the project
G. 10 % of Fillet Joints shall be tested by Dye Pentrent Test Or Magnetic Test
H. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 as applicable for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
I. All pre-insulated piping systems shall be completely sealed and waterproof, and they shall be
capable of allowing sufficient movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Each assembly
shall be factory-designed for the specific service medium, temperature, and pressure. Expansion
loops, expansion joints, anchors, and guides shall be furnished and installed to provide a trouble-
free system and avoid stress on any equipment.100% Welding joints of Pre-insulated piping spools
shall be tested by RT , RT films shall interpretation by approved 3rd party
J. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall comply with the inspection requirements of BS EN 253
or approved equal.
K. On Site Supervision of Underground Pre-insulated Chilled Water Piping Installation:
1. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall have a determined quality assurance program to
ensure compliance with specifications.
2. All inner insulation to be visually inspected to ensure absence of any void prior to the
application of jacket.
3. The following tests shall be performed on daily basis to ensure quality of installation:
a. Density (greater or equal to 60 Kg/m3)

b. Thermal conductivity (smaller or equal to 0.023 W/m°C)
c. Compressive strength (greater or equal to 300 KPa)
d. Closed cell content (greater or equal to 88%)
4. Full Time Factory trained field technical assistance & supervision shall be provided by pre-
insulated manufacturer during installation.
5. Representative's daily written reports to the Resident Engineer: Present the original of each
report on the day it is prepared. The report shall be signed by the manufacturer's
representative. The report shall state whether or not the condition and quality of the
materials used and the installation of the system is in accordance with the plans,
specifications, and published standards of the manufacturer, and is satisfactory in all
respects. If anything connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the report shall state
that corrective action has been taken or shall contain the manufacturer's recommendations
for corrective action. The report shall cover any condition that could result in an
unsatisfactory installation. The representative shall take prompt action to return to the
factory all damaged and defective material, and shall order prompt replacement of such
material.

6. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall deliver to the Resident Engineer a
certificate from the manufacturer that the installation is in compliance with all installation
recommendations and warranty requirements of the manufacturer.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that
fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.5 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
B. Chilled Water (above ground), Heating Water (above ground), Condenser Water (above ground),
and Vent Piping:
1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40 with
threaded ends.
2. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with
threaded ends.
3. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends
for Coupled Joints.
4. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
5. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, Seamless or ERW, and beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
6. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam and beveled
ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
7. Chilled water and heating water piping underground and in utility tunnels, pipe basements
and crawl spaces: Factory pre-insulated chilled/ heating water piping supplied in 12 meters
lengths with beveled ends.
8. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based on ASME B31.1
to verify that wall thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure:
C. Underground Condenser Water Piping: Ductile iron pipe and fittings, with mechanical lock joints.
D. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up Piping: ASTM B88, Type K or L, hard drawn copper
tubing.
E. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:

1. From air handling units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded joints.
2. From fan coil or other terminal units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded joints.
F. Chemical Feed Piping for Condenser Water Treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC),
Schedule 80, ASTM F441/F441M.
G. Diesel Engine Cooling Water: For DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with
threaded joints; for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded joints.
1.6 FACTORY PREFABRICATED (PREINSULATED) CHILLED WATER PIPING

A. General:
1. The piping system shall be designed, fabricated and installed in accordance with ASME
B31.1.
2. The manufacturer of the pre-insulated pipes must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience
in the same field of specified application.
3. Factory trained field technical assistance shall be provided by pre-insulated manufacturer
during installation.
4. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall be capable to provide the necessary engineering
to perform check calculation on piping network stress analysis& movement in the pipe
system and to advise the most appropriate support detail suitable to the insulation jacket.
5. This will determine the need for stress relieving elements such as expansion/contraction
joints or loops.
6. The quality assurance for insulation and jackets shall be in accordance with BS EN 253.
7. All underground pre-insulated chilled water piping shall be factory fabricated in a
controlled environment.
8. All straight lengths, elbows, tees, reducers, anchors and other accessories shall be designed
to prevent the ingress of water or moisture into the insulation and shall be factory
fabricated, insulated, and jacketed.
9. All elbows, tees, reducers, anchors and other accessories shall be designed so field joints
are made in straight sections of pipe only.
10. Installation of the pre-insulated piping shall be in accordance with the pre-insulated pipe
manufacturer’s instructions
11. The insulated piping system shall meet all applicable international standards under ASTM
and BS EN 253 as described herein
B. Service Pipe & Fitting Material: refer to clause no. 2.3 “PIPE AND TUBING”
1. Core Pipe thickness for each size based on service pressure and contractor calculations
check in accordance to ASME-B31.1 Where possible, straight lengths of pipe shall be
supplied in 12 m random lengths. Thin walled pipe should under no circumstances be
accepted
2. Pipe fitting material shall be standard weight ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM
A105/A105M or ASTM A53/A53M Gr. B Seamless or ERW as per Pipe Type. Butt-weld
fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9. Socket weld fittings shall be in
accordance with ASME B 16.11.
3. Pipe elbows shall be long radius, 1.5D minimum centerline radius or bent to a minimum
2D centerline radius in accordance with ASME B31.1.
4. Full and reducing tees shall be forged tees or integrally reinforced forged branch outlet
fittings in accordance with MSS SP-97 or weld-o-lets can be used for reducing tees.
C. Factory Applied Insulation:
1. Insulation Application Process (Under Ground Pipes - Pre insulated Pipes): The insulation
shall be applied by spraying the foam directly onto the pipe and extruding the jacket
directly on top of the foam, or by injecting the polyurethane foam into the annulus between
the service pipe and a pre-extruded casing.
a. Spray Applied System
1) The Polyurethane Insulation:
a) The insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the
service pipe and insulation jacket and shall be bonded to both the
service pipe and insulation jacket to form a completely bonded
system. The polyurethane insulation shall be visually inspected for
voids prior to application of the insulation jacket.
b) The service pipe insulation shall be rigid, closed cell polyurethane
insulation with the minimum properties listed below. The
polyurethane insulation properties shall be in accordance with ASTM

C1029, Type III - Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular

Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.
Property Value Test Method

Density > 60 kg / m3 ASTM D1622
Thermal Conductivity < 0.023 W/m OC ASTM C518
Compressive Strength > 300 kpa ASTM D1621
Closed Cell Content > 88% ASTM D6226
Water absorption < 10 % BS EN 253
c) The minimum insulation thickness shall be the following:
Carrier Pipe Minimum Insulation Thickness

Size
< 400 mm 50 mm
> 450 mm 75 mm
d) Open cell insulation or non-bonded insulation shall not be allowed

e) CO2 foam shall not be allowed except for field joints.
f) The blowing agent used for the polyurethane foam must have zero
ozone depletion rate and shall either be FA 245 B or Cyclopentane.
g) Voids and bubbles shall not constitute more than 5% of the cross
sectional area. No single void shall leave less than 1/3 of the nominal
insulation thickness between the steel service pipe and the casing
h) The manufacturer shall keep records, documenting the raw materials
used, the prescribed mixing ratio and the tests performed.
2) Straight Lengths Jacket:
a) The outer protective insulation jacket shall be seamless, high-density

polyethylene (HDPE).
b) The HDPE jacket shall be extruded directly onto and bonded to the
insulation or shall be a seamless tube with the polyurethane insulation
injected into the annular space between the service pipe and jacket.
The manufacturer shall continuously measure the jacket thickness for
compliance with this specifications utilizing measuring tape,
ultrasonic or laser measurement devices.
c) All straight pipe lengths shall have a water tight end seal on each end.
The end seal shall provide a water tight seal between the service pipe
and insulation jacket. The end seal shall be capable of sealing against
60 kPa water head pressure.
d) The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall submit third party test
reports demonstrating the end seal design is suitable for sealing 60
Kpa water head pressure.
3) Fittings:
a) The outer protective insulation jacket shall be high density

polyethylene (HDPE).
b) The insulation jacket for 90 Deg. elbows shall be molded, seamless
HDPE.
c) The insulation jacket for tees and odd angle elbows shall be extrusion
welded or butt fusion welded HDPE.
d) Hot air welding, adhesive sealing, PVC materials or tape materials
shall not be allowed.
4) Insulation Jacket Properties:

a) The minimum insulation jacket thickness shall be the following table:
Jacket OD Minimum Jacket Thickness

< 180 mm 3 mm
200 mm 3.2 mm
225 mm 3.4 mm
250 mm 3.6 mm
280 mm 3.9 mm
315 mm 4.1 mm
355 mm 4.5 mm
400 mm 4.8 mm
450 mm 5.2 mm
500 mm 5.6 mm
560 mm 6 mm
630 mm 6.6 mm
710 mm 7.2 mm
800 mm 7.9 mm
900 mm 8.7 mm
1000 mm 9.4 mm
1100 mm 10.2 mm
1200 mm 11 mm
1400 mm 12.5 mm
b) The casing may be a separately manufactured pipe or be applied

directly onto the insulation by extrusion.
c) The jacket material shall be black colored PE virgin or rework
material containing only those anti-oxidants, UV- stabilizers and
carbon black necessary for the manufacture and end use of pipes to
this specification. The black colored PE material to be extruded shall
be tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 9080 and classified at least a
PE 80 material in accordance with BS EN ISO 12162.
d) Jacket material to be extruded or molded high density polyethylene
(HDPE) insulation jacket in accordance with ASTM D3350 minimum
cell classification PE345444C
e) Material properties according to following table:
Material property Value Test method

Density (Lbs. / ft3) 58.7 ASTM D1505
Tensile Strength (psi) 3000 ASTM D638
Flexural Modulus (psi) 110,000 ASTM D790
Compressive Strength (psi) 1600 ASTM D695
350 ASTM D638 or BS
Elongation (%)
EN 253
Hardness (Shore D) 62 ASTM D2240
Melt Index (g / 10 min.) 0.15 ASTM D1238
Melting Point (°F) 260 ASTM D3418
Vicat Softening Temperature (°F) 250 ASTM D1525
Heat Distortion Temperature (°F) >170 ASTM D648
Brittleness Temperature (°F) <76 ASTM D746
Thermal Expansion (in. /in.) (approximate) 1.0 x 10-4 ASTM D790
Thermal Conductivity (Btu in. / Hr. Ft² °F) 2.7 – 3.0 ASTM C177
Specific Heat (Btu / Lb. °F) 0.50 -
Carbon black content 2.5-3% BS EN 253
a) Glass reinforced plastic (GRP) jacket may be used as an alternative

jacket for all underground pre-insulated pipes and fittings; refer to the
technical requirements of the GRP jacket in the subsequent clauses.

5) Bonding Of Polyurethane Foam To Pipe And Jacket
a) The manufacturer must prove that the foam is bonded to both the
service pipe and the jacket.
b) The shear strength (bond) must fulfill the minimum requirements of
following table:
Test temperature ax (axial shear tan (tangential shear

strength) strength)
23 ºC± 2 0.12 Mpa 0.20 Mpa
140 ºC± 2 0.08 Mpa -
b. Insulation-Injection Process
1) The service pipe insulation shall be rigid, closed cell polyurethane insulation
with the minimum properties listed below injected into the annulus between
the service pipe and the HDPE casing.

Core Density (minimum) > 60 kg / m3 ASTM D1622
Overall density (maximum) 90 kg / m3 ASTM D1622
Compressive Strength (radial > 300 Kpa ASTM D1621
direction)*
Closed Cell Content > 88% ASTM D6226
Water Absorption < 10 % BS EN 253
*Manufacturer shall document the direction the sample is taken. (For injected
systems the compressive strength is not same in axial and radical direction)
a) The minimum insulation thickness shall be as specified for the spray

applied System and shall be observed by choosing a casing size
according to following table. If it is not possible to achieve the
insulation thickness with the standard size jacket select the next
increment.
Carrier Pipe Size Minimum Insulation Thickness

< 400 mm 50 mm
> 450 mm 75 mm
b) Voids and bubbles shall not constitute more than 5% of the cross
sectional area. No single void shall leave less than 1/3 of the nominal
insulation thickness between the steel service pipe and the casing
c) CO2 foam shall not be allowed except for field joints.
d) The manufacturer shall keep records, documenting the raw materials
used, the prescribed mixing ratio and the tests performed.
e)
f) The Jacket pipe material and thickness shall be as specified for the
Spray Applied System, HDPE casings must be internally treated
using corona treatment or other proven method to optimize bonding
between polyurethane foam and HDPE jacket.
Nominal Outside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness

< 180 mm 3 mm
200 mm 3.2 mm
225 mm 3.4 mm

250 mm 3.6 mm
280 mm 3.9 mm
315 mm 4.1 mm
355 mm 4.5 mm
400 mm 4.8 mm
450 mm 5.2 mm
500 mm 5.6 mm
560 mm 6 mm
630 mm 6.6 mm
710 mm 7.2 mm
800 mm 7.9 mm
900 mm 8.7 mm
1000 mm 9.4 mm
1100 mm 10.2 mm
1200 mm 11 mm
1400 mm 12.5 mm
g) All straight pipe lengths shall have a water tight end seal on each end.
The end seal shall provide a water tight seal between the service pipe
and insulation jacket. The end seal shall be capable of sealing against
60 kpa water head pressure.
h) The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall submit test reports
demonstrating the end seal design is suitable for sealing 60 kpa water
head pressure.
i) Bonding of polyurethane foam to pipe and jacket, shall be as
specified for the Spray Applied System.
c. Field joints for Underground Pre-insulated Pipes:
1) Field joints shall be made in straight sections of pipe only. Field joints at
elbows or tees or field insulated elbows or tees shall not be allowed.
2) The service pipe shall be hydrostatically pressure tested at a minimum of
150% of the design pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1. Hydro testing
shall be performed prior to applying the insulation and jacket at the field
joint.
3) Insulation shall then be poured in place into the field joint area in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions
4) A heat shrinkable, pressure testable field joint closure shall be installed over
the field joint area and pressure tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction prior to insulating the field joint area.
5) All field joint insulation and heat shrink sleeve materials for the field joint
shall be furnished by the pre-insulated pipe manufacturer.
2. Insulation Application Process (Above Ground Pipes Pre insulated Pipes)
a. The pipe insulation material shall be Polyisocyanurate PIR foam.
b. The used Polyisicyanurate (PIR) insulation material shall be fire rated according to
BS 476-7 Class 1.
c. The fire rated PIR insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the
service pipe and the GRP jacket. The fire rated PIR insulation shall be visually
inspected for voids prior to application of the vapor barrier and insulation jacket.
d. The service pipe insulation shall be fire rated PIR insulation in accordance with BS
476-7 Class1 and shall be certified by third party approved testing laboratory to
meet this requirement with the minimum properties as listed below:


Density > 60kg / m3 ASTM D1622
Compressive Strength > 300 kPa ASTM D1621
Closed Cell Content >88% ASTM D 6226
Fire rating Class 1 BS 476-7
Water Absorption < 10 % BS EN 253
e. The insulation thickness shall be minimum 50 mms for sizes up to DN 300 400and
shall be 75 mms for pipe sizes DN 350 450and larger.
D. GRP Outer Jacket
1. All Straight section of the insulated piping system are to be jacketed with a filament wound
polyester / fiberglass reinforced laminate (GRP) directly applied onto the outer surface of
the insulation. Combinations of helical winding, for water and moisture barrier, and
circumferential winding, for mechanical strength, shall be used to build up a thickness not
less than 6.55 mm or more than 10 mm. The polyester resin portion of the composite
material is to be comprised of base resin, catalyst, accelerator, color pigments, ultra violet
inhibitors and flame / smoke suppressants as required.
2. The lateral flame spread along the surface of the (GRP) jacket shall meet the requirements
of BS 476-7 Class 1. The manufacturer shall submit a third party certification that the
(GRP) jacket is in compliance with BS 476-7 Class 1.
3. The resin to glass ratio of the filament wound GRP shall not be less than 40 percent resin to
60 percent glass. Properties of the filament wound GRP are to be as specified below:
a. Minimum Barcol hardness per ASTM 2583 35

b. Minimum ultimate flexural strength per ASTM D790 125,000 Kpa
c. Minimum ultimate tensile strength per ASTM D638 100,000 Kpa
d. Minimum compressive strength per ASTM D695 225,000 Kpa
4. All pre-insulated pipes shall be delivered from factory with water tight end seal at each
end.
5. The fittings shall be insulated in the factory with molded GRP jacket.
6.
E. Field Joints for Above ground Pre-insulated Pipes
1. The field joint area shall be insulated with fire rated PIR insulation injected at site in a
temporary mold Pre-made PIR half round sections shall also be allowed but, only, for field
joint insulation procedure.
2. The field joint closure shall be a wrap on isophthalic polyester system reinforced with glass
fiber tape. The joint shall be UV cured at temperatures between -15°C and +70°C.
3. Thickness dimensions of the field installed PIR insulation and jacket shall not be less than
those of the pre-insulated piping.
4. Field joints shall be made in straight sections of pipe only. Field joints at elbows or tees or
field insulated elbows or tees shall not be allowed.
5. All field joint insulation and jacketing shall be performed in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s instructions.
6. The manufacturer must perform shear tests to verify that the foam is firmly bonded to
service pipe jacket. The shear bond required strength shall conform to BS EN 253.
1.7 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM:

A. TDR leak detection system:
1. The pre-insulated piping system shall include complete cable-type leak detection and
location system consisting of a microprocessor based monitoring unit, sensing cable, and
auxiliary equipment required to provide continuous monitoring of the sensing cable
string(s) for leaks, shorts and breaks. If any of these conditions should occur at any point
along the sensing cable, an alarm shall sound, type of condition shall be clearly identified
and the location clearly displayed.
2. The Leak Detection and Location System manufacturer shall have at least ten years’
experience in supplying leak detection systems for pre-insulated piping systems.
3. The Leak Detection and Location System shall locate the point of origin of the first liquid
leak or fault (break/short/probe) within 0.1% of the sensing cable string length, or 2.5
m, whichever is greater. The system shall identify the type of alarm leak/break/short as
well as the location. The system shall be able to monitor (detect and locate) a first leak
with up to 30 m of sensing cable wetted without significant inaccuracy in location.
4. The system shall be capable of monitoring up to 1,500 m of sensing cable per sensing cable
string from a single monitoring unit.
5. The system shall be capable of monitoring (detecting and locating) for multiple leaks or
additional liquid on the sensing cable. The system shall be able to monitor multiple leaks
with up to 30 m of sensing cable wetted with reduced location accuracy.
6. The system shall be capable of identifying the location of breaks and shorts on the sensing
cable. When either of these faults occurs, an alarm shall sound and a display visible on the
front of the monitoring unit shall clearly indicate the type of fault, i.e. BREAK or SHORT
and display the location of the fault.
7. The system shall continuously provide positive indication that it is monitoring the sensing
cable string and the status of the sensing cable string. The system clock shall provide the
time and date on the LCD of the monitoring panel. The system clock shall be
programmable by the user. A time and date indication shall be included for all events
recorded in memory.
8. The sensing cable shall be installed on or near the service pipe in the polyurethane
insulation. The sensing cable shall be a twisted-pair consisting of 2 insulated 1.5 mm2
insulated copper wires suitable for exposure to temperatures up to 130°C. The sensing
cable shall detect all water-based liquids. Maximum length of the sensing cable string shall
be 1500 m.
9. The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation
instructions and by properly trained personnel.
10. The monitoring unit shall be installed in an indoor, temperature controlled environment.
11. A location map shall be provided with the system by the installing contractor; indicating
the "As Installed" system configuration and sensing cable string layout. Distance along the
sensing cable shall be provided as references to locate leaks. Distance shall be based upon
Calibration Points taken.
12. The installing contractor shall be responsible for taking and recording calibration points
along each sensing cable string in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions. Calibration points shall be used to prepare the Location Map.
13. The Leak Detection and Location System manufacturer shall provide a factory trained field
service technician to support the proper installation of the system by the installer. Field
technical assistance shall be provided for critical periods of installation including:
a. Installation training
b. Field joint connections and testing
c. Monitoring unit connections and testing
d. System start-up and calibration
B. NORDIC Leak Detection System:
1. All pre-insulated straight pipes and fittings shall be provided with a minimum of two
embedded sensor wires in the insulation at a fixed distance from the steel pipe and
surveillance.

a. Sensor wires : 1,5mm2 copper wire

b. Wire resistance: 1.2-1.5 /100m wire
c. Distance to steel service pipe: 15mm
d. Position: ±30-200mm from 12 o’clock position
e. The surveillance system shall comply with BS EN 14419.
2. Connections of the surveillance wires of each straight pipe and straight pipe to fitting shall
be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. The function of the surveillance system shall be based on the electronic properties of the
insulation changing with the moisture content.
4. The monitoring system shall be able to survey the entire system including straight pipes,
bends, branches and all other fittings and be capable of detecting more than one leak after
acknowledgement of previous or current leak.
5. The monitoring system shall comprise a microprocessor unit, which shall fast and easily
detect and locate any fault by using a built-in pulse echo meter (TDR) also called Cable
Radar. The unit shall have an integrated function to ensure that the surveillance system is
operational at all times.
6. The surveillance system shall work as a fully documented system taking measurements of
each increment of the entire length of the sensor wires and storing the received data on a
data base memory, with the measurements after one month of system operating a the
design flow and return temperatures being used as the start-up data. In monitoring mode
actual data shall be compared with start-up data in order to detect deviations.
7. The signal range shall be a minimum of 3000m of pipeline with an accuracy of less than
1.0m.
8. The unit shall easily be connected to a computer by means of signal cable, internet or GSM
(TCP/IP) protocol.
1.8 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:
A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping system
accessories shall be cellular glass conforming to ASTM C552, calcium silicate conforming to
ASTM C533 or polyurethane matching the pipe insulation. Insulation shall be pre-molded, precut
or job fabricated to fit and shall be removable and reusable. Thickness shall match adjacent piping.
B. Metal jackets shall be provided for all pipe insulation in manholes. Insulation bands shall be 19
mm wide 0.13 mm stainless steel.
C. Buried fittings and accessories shall be factory fabricated and may have field foamed polyurethane
insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected with a covering matching the pipe
casing. Shrink sleeves shall be provided over casing connection joints.
1.9 END SEALS:
A. General: Each pre-insulated section of piping shall have a complete sealing of the insulation to
provide permanent water and vapor seal at each end of the pre-insulated section of piping. Pre-
insulated sections of piping modified in the field shall be provided with an end seal which is
equivalent to the end seals furnished with the pre-insulated section of piping. Provide complete
sealing of the insulation at each end of each pre-insulated conduit section by one of the following
methods:
1. Carrying the outer casing over tapered pipe insulation ends and extending it to the carrier
pipe. Provide sufficient surface bonding area between the casing and the carrier pipe to
ensure a permanent water and vapor resistant seal.
2. Using specially designed prefabricated caps made of the same material and not less than
the same thickness as the casing. Provide sufficient surface bonding area between the cap,
and both the casing and carrier pipe, to ensure permanent water and vapor resistant seal.

B. Factory casing and end seal testing and certification:
1. Testing and certification procedures by an independent testing laboratory shall demonstrate

that casings and end seals are capable of resisting penetration of water into the casing and
insulation at 60 kPa of head pressure, measured above the highest point of the test sample,
subjected over the entire surface of an 2.5 m test sample of prefabricated pipe for not less
than 48 hours. Test shall use 24 degrees C water for chilled water service, while the sample
is either buried or encased in dry bedding sand with a minimum of 305 mm of sand all
around sample. The carrier pipe size in the test section shall be 75 mm in diameter and
shall be restrained during the test period. The insulation thickness shall not exceed the
maximum thickness provided for the piping in the project.
1.10 JOINTS:
A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings shall be
provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall be made with either welding tees
or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the main and reinforced against external strains.
B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly square and tight.
Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all gaskets shall be as thin as the finish
of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25 through 300 mm (1
through 12 inch) flanges and 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm (14 inches) and larger.
C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male
threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining
copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and protected against
corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints between nonmetallic and metallic
carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by the piping system manufacturer. The transition
pieces shall be factory fabricated and shall be designed so that no field chemical welding of the
carrier pipe will be required. Transitional joint connections to manhole steel piping shall be made
inside the manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped manholes where joints shall be outside the
manhole wall.
G. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.
H. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with the written
instructions of the manufacturer.
1.11 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. General
1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or ASTM
A53/A53M Grade B, suitable for butt welding, seamless or ERW and thickness as per
matching pipe.
2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, socket welded fittings
shall be to ASME B16.11.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms and chiller house
but not in pre-insulated pipes running in culverts or tunnels.

4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping only.
1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4,
may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of
close nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose thread, with hose
cap nut.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings are optional for
water piping only.
1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or
ASTM A53/A53M Grade B ERW.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows
shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11.
4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick full face
neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges, with
Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade
B.
D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets may
be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel
half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer shall be used with
roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron, ASTM
A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more track-head,
square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or
steel, ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, designed to accept grooved mechanical
couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
1.12 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
A. Solder Joint:
1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials

applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically
extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube

surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of tube
wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of
the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow
where the branch tube penetrates the fitting.
B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
1.13 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466.

1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el.
B. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC),
Schedule 80, ASTM F439.
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.
1.15 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.
C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A
47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel;
or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept
grooved end couplings.
D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber

gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or
lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being
welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
1.16 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, butterfly valves and motorized valves are specified in Section "General-
Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.

C. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate and globe
valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.
D. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline is located
2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
E. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
F. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, used for balancing, shut off and measuring of pressure
drop. Balancing valves shall be provided with two measuring nipples to have the possibility to
measure the differential pressure (water flow indirectly) through the balancing valve and a tight
shut off function with a hidden memory of the setting. Each valve shall be provided with a label
including at least the valve reference number, valve’s diameter, design flow, setting after balancing
and pressure drop in setting and design position. All valves shall be supplied with Prefab
insulation material sourced from the valve manufacturer, made of Polyurethane, volume weight
50-60 Kg/cubic m.
G. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze body, fitted with a
red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded end connections.
H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-pattern globe valve
style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet bolts chromed steel and digital
hand wheel, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating
temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections.
I. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure
check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and
stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set
at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
J. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal
working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV: Heating Boilers, Bear ASME stamp
K. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with testing lever.
Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8; bear ASME stamp.
L. Automatic Dynamic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain constant flow
with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a readout kit
including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall have an
identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve
number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 1206 kPa (175 psig) at 93 deg C (200 deg F) with
stainless-steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F)
with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly easily
removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control valve, with
stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves, and
designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F).
M. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check valve and
balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve with spring-loaded weighted
disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and shut-off.
Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Unit shall be installed on
discharge side of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the stem up. Unit shall be cast iron

body construction suitable for maximum working pressure of 1205 kPa (175 PSI) and maximum
operating temperature of 149 C (300 F), bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring.
N. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in accordance with MSS SP-80.
Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above with a threaded end connection.
Valve shall be provided with a water hose nipple adapter.
O. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa (400-psig)
minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
1.17 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Air Vents
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig)
working pressure; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8) discharge connection and DN 15
(NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; 116 deg C (240 deg F)
operating temperature; with DN 8 (NPS 1/4) discharge connection and DN 15 (NPS 1/2)
inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded end connections
B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 1206-kPa (175-psig) working pressure
and 121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system
water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible [diaphragm] [bladder] securely sealed
into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging
fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles.
Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 1206-kPa
(175-psig) minimum working pressure and 191 deg C (375 deg F) maximum operating
temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into
expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2)
and smaller; flanged connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; threaded blowdown
connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity. Applicable to central plants.
D. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system
flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 1206 kPa (175 psig) and liquid
temperature up to 149 deg C (300 deg F).
E. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air
from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum working pressure of 1206 kPa
(175 psig) and temperature of 121 deg C (250 deg F).
F. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 860-kPa (125-psig) working pressure; 19-L
(5-gal.) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

G. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A126-04,
Class B), flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2)
and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
H. Basket Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM
A126-04, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and
bottom drain connection.
I. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F)
maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to
match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch) misalignment.
J. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled to
align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 121 deg C (250 deg F)
and pressures up to 1035 kPa (150 psig).
K. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure, steel pipe
fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods,
flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
1.18 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of design
flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing taps
upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout valves to
facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an
integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves and
quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing ports may be
pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A system comprised of two valves of bronze and stainless
steel metallurgy designed for 1205 kPa pressure at 121 degrees C, with thermal insulation sleeve.
F. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain venturi and dual
quick connect valves with integral check valves and color coded safety caps for
pressure/temperature readout.
G. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick connect valve for
pressure/temperature readout.
H. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.

2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate factor
and design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
I. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect
connections.

J. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves
showing flow rate versus pressure differential.
K. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed flow
devices.
L. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm diameter, or 450 mm
long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct reading in lps with three valve manifold and
two shut-off valves.
1.19 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe movement
which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-built or field-
fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion and direct the axial
pipe movement into the expansion joints.
B. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association

Standards.
C. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor failure if one or
both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.
D. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.
E. Expansion Compensators:
1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.

2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.
F. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on each
expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design pressure
and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the identification
number on the contract drawings.
G. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and to
restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum of 15
percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built
guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.

1.20 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water), initial
mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (4-1/2
inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black graduations
and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set
hand" to indicate normal working pressure.
B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in water
service.
C. Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range.
1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to plus 700 kPa
(100 psig).
1.21 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with retained
safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where shown, or in lieu
of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:
1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage adapter
probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, , –—100 kPa (30
inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree accuracy, 25 mm
(one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.
1.22 THERMOMETERS
A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150 mm (6
inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.
C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard. Required ranges
in degrees C (F):
1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)
1.23 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. External chilled water/ heating water pipes and chilled water/ heating water pipes inside utility
culverts or directly buried: Pre-insulated piping. Chilled water/ heating water pipes inside building:
Black steel pipes.
B. Condensate drain pipes: uPVC pipes.

C. Chilled water/ heating water pipes above ground and exposed to outdoors: Black steel pipes.
D. External chilled water/ heating water pipes in plant rooms only (excluding utility culverts): Pre-
insulated piping with aluminum jacketing. For jacketing requirements, refer to section 230719.
E. Condenser water pipes: Black steel pipes.
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or
other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7
times "SE" value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific requirements for
welding joints in hydronic piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and approval by

welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted for

review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for welding
activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
ND OF SECTION 232113

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
for hydronic pumps, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501,
“Saudi Energy Conservation Code” SBC 601 and the standards listed below in this section;
whichever is more stringent.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
A. Certificates for pumps and accessories shall show conformance with the referenced standards con-
tained in this section. Pumps provided shall conform to ISO 5199 and ISO 2858 standards for cen-
trifugal pumps and to requirements specified herein.
B. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.
C. Pump casings shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, seasoned cast iron with a design working pressure of
minimum 1.5 times system’s operating pressure, or the minimum specified rating whichever is
greater. Casings shall be single or double volute with flanged piping connections conforming to
ASME B16.1, MSS SP-51, MSS SP-86 and ISO 7005-2 Class 125 psi.
D. Motors: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general re-
quirements for factory-installed motors. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continu-
ous duty, Design B, except Design C where required for high starting torque or equivalent charac-
teristics in accordance with IEC 60034 parts 1 to 30. Include built-in, thermal-overload protec-
tion, grease-lubricated ball bearings and terminal blocks. Select each motor to be non-overloading
over full range of pump performance curve.
E. Motors Indicated to be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to

IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard industry
motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Pump impeller assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123

G. Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling or closed coupling.
Flexible member shall be a tire shape in shear, or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of
chloroprene materials and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric
connector and shall not transmit sound, vibration, or end thrust.
H. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel bedplate, multiribbed for maximum rigidity,
with adequate number of grout holes and grout air vents, and with drip rim and drain tapping.
I. Mechanical seals shall be balanced or unbalanced, as necessary to conform to specified service re-
quirements. Mechanical seals shall be constructed in a manner and of materials particularly suita-
ble for the temperature service range and chemical analysis of water being pumped. Materials of
construction shall include AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, solid tungsten-carbide rotating-
seal face, and Buna-N vinylidene-fluoride-hexafluoropropylene, EPT, or tetrafluoroethylene seals.
Seal construction shall not require external source cooling for pumped-fluid service temperatures
up to 121 degrees C (250 deg. F). Seal pressure rating shall be suitable for maximum system hy-
draulic conditions.
J. Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball or roller type with full provisions for the mechanical and hy-
draulic radial and thrust loads imposed by any normal service condition. Bearings shall be manu-
factured from vacuum-degassed or processed-alloy steel. Thrust bearings shall be secured to the
shaft by threaded collar and locknut. Double-row ball or roller bearings shall be self-aligning.
Bearings shall have an L-10 rated life of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be pro-
vided with grease supply and relief fittings located at bottom of bearings.
K. Factory finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint shall be applied to factory-assembled and tested
units before shipping. Special coating shall be applied for pumps exposed to outdoor and other
corrosive environment.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation and seismic restraints.
C. Seismic Performance: Pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in
accordance with SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. Close-Coupled, End-Suction Centrifugal Pumps:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

3. Pump Shaft Sleeve: Bronze.
4. Pump Stub Shaft: Type 304 orType 316 stainless steel.
5. Seal: Mechanical.
6. Motor Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
7. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.
8. Motor Speed: Variable or ECM.

B. Separately Coupled, Base-Mounted, End-Suction Centrifugal Pumps:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron. Integral mount on volute to support the casing and
attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnection piping
or requiring realignment of pump and motor shaft.
3. Pump Shaft: Carbon steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve or Type 304 stainless steelor
Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.
6. Shaft Coupling: Drop-out type molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider with EPDM
coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
7. Coupling Guard: Dual rated, steel, removable, attached to mounting frame.
8. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members.
9. Motor Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
10. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1.
11. Motor Speed: Variable or ECM.
C. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Package units with corrosion-resistant pump, aluminum or
plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls.
D. Specialty Fittings:
1. Suction diffuser.
2. Triple-duty valves.
E. Integral Pump Motor Variable-Speed Controllers:
1. For pumps indicated to be variable speed.

2. Integrated Pump Controller: Direct BMS communication via Modbus RTU or BACnet™
MS/TP.
F. Electronically Commutated Motors (ECMs):
1. For pumps indicated.

2. Synchronous, constant torque, ECM with permanent magnet rotor.
3. Driven by frequency converter.
1.7 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Startup service by a factory-authorized service representative.
1.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. By a factory-authorized service representative.

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
1.2 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One manual bypass feeder and one automatic dosing system on each
system with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment manually through bypass feeder when required or indicated
by test and automatically through electronic solid-state controller and feeding pumps.
B. Open-Loop Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers, and Cooling Towers:
PVC tubing with hole to feed chemical.
1. Conductivity controller samples sump water when activated by pump and operates solenoid
bleed-off valve in line to drain.
C. Open-Loop, Condenser Water Piping: Pump sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor from
solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Use agitator as required.
1. Intermittently feed biocide to condenser water to achieve a toxic level of the chemical to
kill the organism present.
2. Change biocides periodically to avoid chemical immunity.
3. Activate chemical solution pump from water meter in makeup water line to cooling tower
when condenser water pumps are running.
4. Automatically feed chemical with electronic solid-state controllers.
5. Deactivate solution pump and signal alarm by a liquid-level switch in each solution tank on
low chemicals.
A. Products, material, and equipment shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation for HVAC
water treatment, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the
standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent
C. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment

service provider, capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and
applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500

1.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum conditions in
the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the cooling, chilled-
water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year
from date of Substantial Completion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.
A. Provide all hardware, chemicals, and other material necessary to maintain HVAC water quality in
all systems as indicated in this Specification. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize
corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment
without creating a hazard to operating personnel or to the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel
capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Quality Parameters for Closed Hydronic Systems:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 8.5 to 10.5.

2. Steel Corrosion Inhibiters: Provide sufficient inhibitors to limit mild steel corrosion to 0 to
0.5 mils per year.
3. Yellow Metal Corrosion Inhibitor: Provide sufficient copper and brass corrosion inhibitors
to limit copper corrosion to 0 to 0.2 mils per year.
4. Scale Control: Provide softened water for initial fill and makeup. Where softened water is
not used, provide sufficient scale inhibitors to prevent formation of scale and maintain all
scale-forming material in solution.
5. Dispersants: Provide sufficient dispersants to prevent sedimentation of fine particulate
matter.
6. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
7. Small, Open Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers, and Cooling
Towers: Maintain system essentially free of scale, total suspended solids, and fouling to
sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).

b. pH: 7.5 to 8.5.
8. Condenser Water, Medium-to-Large Cooling Tower System: Maintain system essentially

free of scale and total suspended solids to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Calcium Balance: 90 to 100 percent.

b. Water Concentration: Not more than 6.

c. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).

d. pH: 7.5 to 8.5.
e. Microbiological Limits:
1) Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 10,000

organisms/mL.
2) Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000
organisms/mL.
3) Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
4) Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
5) Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. Automatic Chemical-Feed Equipment:
1. AWWA C700, oscillating-piston, magnetic-drive, totalization meter.

2. Water Meter: Oscillating-piston or Turbine-type, totalization meter.
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: (860 kPa).
c. Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: (20 kPa).
3. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a. Digital readout display.

b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
c. High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence
switch.
e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
4. Inhibitor Injection Timers: Microprocessor-based controller with digital display.

5. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.
a. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60 Hz, single-phase motor.

b. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
6. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles
for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
7. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial
adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light,
output to control circuit, and recorder.
8. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid
enclosure with 120-V, continuous-duty coil.
9. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full
range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
10. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and
polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals.
11. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element.
12. Biocide Feeder Timer: Microprocessor-based controller with digital display.
B. Chemical Solution Tanks: High-density opaque polyethylene with minimum 110 percent
containment vessel.
C. Chemical Solution Injection Pumps: Self-priming, positive displacement.

D. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing with
heat fusion.
E. Chemical Treatment Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying
case, for testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total
alkalinity and for calcium hardness field tests.
F. Chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer.
1. Chemicals for direct steam injection humidification and for steam used in direct contact
with food to be FDA approved and safe for these uses.
2. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
3. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
4. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust
pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
G. Multimedia Filters: Simplex, multimedia filter system of filter tank, media, strainer, circulating
pump, piping, and controls.
1. Filter Tank: Corrosion resistant with distribution system and media.
1.7 TOWER BASIN SWEEPING & FILTRATION SYSTEM (CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS)
A. Description: Simplex separator housing with baffles and chambers for removing particles from
water by centrifugal action and gravity, including tower basin agitation system.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
C. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.
1. Construction: Fabricate and label steel separator housing to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of feedwater.
3. Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation of particles.
4. Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles.
5. Outlet: Near top of unit.
6. Purge: At bottom of collection chamber.
7. Pipe Connections (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
8. Pipe Connections (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5
or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if tank is stainless
steel.
D. Motorized Purge Valve: Gate or plug pattern valve.
1. Motorized Valves: Butterfly-type, flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron body, with EPDM

valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B 148 aluminum bronze disc.
E. Strainer: Stainless-steel basket type mounted on pump suction.
F. Piping: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, F, or E; Grade B, Schedule 40 black steel, with flanged,
grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding, or ductile-iron fittings.
G. Piping: (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed,
flanged, or grooved joints.

H. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal.
Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

2. Pressure Rating: (860 kPa) minimum.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and
keyed to shaft.
4. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
6. Motor: Open, dripproof motor supported on the pump-bearing frame. General requirements
for motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
I. Controls: Automatic control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory wired for single
electrical connection.
1. Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.

2. Pump: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position bypasses safeties and
controls.
3. Separator Purge: Automatic and manual.
4. TSS Controller Interlock: Open separator purge valve with bleed-off control.
J. Support: Skid mounting. Fabricate supports and base and attachment to separator housing with
reinforcement strong enough to resist separator movement during a seismic event when separator
base is anchored to building structure.
K. Tower basin agitation system: provide complete tower basin agitation system including piping,
directional vortexing nozzles, supports, and isolating valves.
1. Layout:
a. Distribute nozzles based on nozzle capacities as per manufacturer recommendations
to sweep tower basin solid particles towards filtration system pump suction, and
away from any other system pump suction areas..
b. Use a closed-loop header in order to equalize the pressure to each nozzle.
c. Eliminate weirs, baffles or other devices which may promote settling or dead spots
within the sump.
d. Take advantage of existing slopes to direct solids toward the low end of the sump.
e. Position the system's pump intake where solids are most likely to enter the sump.
2. Piping: Schedule 40 PVC
3. Maximum residual pressure at nozzles: 30 psi (20.7 bars)
4. Components specifications as per below:
Component Materials of Construction
Nozzle Polypropylene
Clamp Base Fiberglass Reinforced Polypropylene
Clamp Cap Fiberglass Reinforced Polypropylene
Swivel Ball Polypropylene
Clamp Spring Hardened 304 SS
Clamp O-Ring Buna-N
L. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Separator Design: as per mechanical drawings and schedules

1) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent.
2) Particle-Specific Gravity: 1.8.
3) Particle Size: 71 microns and larger.
2. Housing:

a. Material: Steel.
3. Circulating Pump: as per mechanical drawings and schedules
1.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
A. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically feeding chemicals and bleeding the
system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations. Automatic chemical feed systems
shall automatically feed chemicals into the chilled water based on varying system conditions.
Chilled water quality at selected locations as directed by The Engineer shall be automatically
monitored by the system.
B. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled materials of construction including ferrous, and red
and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling. Corrosion
rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year penetration; ferrous, 0 to 2;
copper and brass, 0 to 1. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk
water temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 deg. F) and 52 deg. C (126 deg.
F). Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by fouling factor
0.0005.
C. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved proprietary compound
suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which will cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion
problems or mechanical seal failure due to excessive total dissolved solids. Shot feed manually.
Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment laboratory, taking into consideration
residual and temperature effect on pump mechanical seals.
D. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range of 8.0 to
10.0.
E. Pot Feeder: Bypass type for chemical treatment schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge) heads, 20 mm system
connections and large neck opening for chemical addition. Feeders shall be 7.6 L (2 gallon)
minimum size for hot water heating systems and 18.9 L (5 gallon) for chilled water systems.
1. The pot feeder shall be designed & implemented according to ASME code for pressure
vessels with necessary verification certificates & name plates.
F. Contractor to provide selection & sizing criteria of the chemical equipment (e.g. chemical dosing
pumps & tanks) for the corrosion and biocide inhibitor systems.
G. Contractor to submit warrantee certificate that guarantee, for three years from the date of testing &
commissioning, the following:
1. The performance and operation of the chemical treatment system.

2. The components of the chemical treatment system against any manufacturing or work ship
defects.
H. Contractor is requested to submit a method statement of how to bring the quantity of water into the
system during flushing process and where it will be disposed.

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
“Product Requirements.”
Metal ducts, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the stand-
ards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
3. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless other-
wise indicated.
E. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless
F. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Opera-
tions," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
C. Mockups:
1. Before installing duct systems, build mockups representing static-pressure classes in excess
of 500 Pa. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:
a. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
b. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
1) Five transverse joints.
2) One access door(s).
3) Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
4) Two typical flexible duct or flexible-connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.
5) Duct with internal duct liner
METAL DUCTS 233113

2. Perform leakage tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Revise mockup construc-
tion and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable re-
sults.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging
the completed Work.
5. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
a.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 MATERIALS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" based on static-pressure class.
B. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
C. Sheet Metal Materials:
1. Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASRM A653/A653M.
a. Galvanized Coating Designation: Z275.

b. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
2. Factory-applied antimicrobial coating having a hardness of 2H minimum when tested in
accordance with ASTM D3363.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by
an NRTL.
3. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized,

sheet steel with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation; factory-applied, 0.10-mm
PVC coating on exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for
underground applications and interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handling applications)
and with factory-applied, 0.05-mm PVC coating on reverse side of ducts and fittings.
4. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
5. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces
of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
6. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
D. Duct Liner:
1. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B
METAL DUCTS 233113

2. Flexible elastomeric: Preformed, cellular, non-hydroscopic, closed-cell, sheet materials

complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B
and NFPA 255 .
a. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value) 0.034 (W/mK) at 24°C mean temperature.

b. Density: 48-96 kg/m3
c. Water vapor permeability: 0.04 metric perm at 25 mm thickness.
d. Noise Reduction (NRC): 0.5 at 25.4 mm.
e. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by
an NRTL.
f. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
g. Duct Liner shall pass the test for:
1) Mold Growth as per UL181

2) Fungi Resistance as per ASTM G21/C1338
3) Bacterial Resistance as per ASTM G22
h. Liner hot surface performance shall shows no evidence of cracking, flaming, glowing,
smoldering, delamination, melting or insulation collapse when tested according to
ASTM C 411 at 105°C.
E. Sealant Materials:
1. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
2. Two-part tape sealing system.
3. Water-based joint and seam sealant.
4. Solvent-based joint and seam sealant.
5. Flanged joint sealant.
6. Flange gaskets.
7. Round duct joint O-ring seals.
F. Exposed metal ducting shall be painted to match interior finish as per requirements of Architectural
sections for painting.
1.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Channel support system.
B. Galvanized-steel restraint cables.
C. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod.
1.6 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Clean the following items:
1. Air outlets and inlets.

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans.
3. Air-handling units.
METAL DUCTS 233113

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
1.7 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through pene-
tration fire stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, hav-
ing fire resistance ratings.
1.8 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-
rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with not less than 1.52-mm thick, carbon-steel sheet for
concealed ducts and not less than 1.21-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Continuous weld
seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel. Continuous weld seams
and joints.
D. Acid-Resistant Ducts: PVC-coated galvanized steel.
E. Smoke Extract Ducts: shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet with 1.6mm thickness, welded
longitudinal joints, flanged sectional joints, reinforced with girders, and sealed with fire rated
sealants.
F. Smoke Extract Ducts and other ducts crossing fire rated walls without fire dampers shall be fire
proofed ducts. Contractor shall submit clear method statement for the constructing of fire/ smoke
rated ducts for approval, such as applying fire resistant coating similar to products of PROMAT
(UK) or approved equal, which reacts in contact with fire by forming an insulating barrier to
separates two contiguous areas, or by other proven and approved methods. Smoke extract ducts
should be two hours fire rated at 400 deg. C.
METAL DUCTS 233113

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification for air
duct accessories, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the
C. Installation Standards: NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
design.

Requirements.”
A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating" for dampers
rating.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275).

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with
mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, one-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300

C. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. Backdraft and Pressure Relief Dampers: Tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 511, multiple
blade, parallel action, gravity balanced with return springs.
B. Barometric Relief Dampers: Horizontal or vertical mounting; multiple blade, parallel action, gravity
balanced with return springs.
C. Manual Volume Dampers: Multiple and single blade, parallel- -blade design, with linkage outside
airstream.
1. Standard, steel, manual volume dampers.

2. Standard, aluminum, manual volume dampers.
3. Low-leak, steel, manual volume dampers, tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 511.
4. Low-leak, aluminum, manual volume dampers, tested and rated in accordance with AMCA
511.
D. Control Dampers: Parallel blade design; galvanized-steel frame and blades, tested and rated in
accordance with AMCA 511.
E. Fire Dampers: Static and dynamic, heat-responsive device, rated and labeled in accordance with UL
555 by an NRTL.
F. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers: Static and dynamic heat-responsive device rated and labeled
according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
G. Flange connectors.
H. Duct Silencers: Factory fabricated and tested, round or rectangular.
1. Compliant with ASHRAE 62.1 for surfaces in contact with airstream

2. Flame spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50
according to ASTM E84.
I. Turning Vanes: Double-blade, galvanized sheet steel.
J. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Double wall, rectangular, galvanized sheet steel with insulation in
accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-
2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels."
K. Pressure Relief Access Doors: Single wall Flexible Connectors: Indoor and outdoor in accordance
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-2 (7-2M),
"Duct Access Doors and Panels."
L. Duct accessory hardware.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300

SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation for flexible ducts, as
listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the standards listed below
in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Installation Standards: NFPA 90A, SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1," and
ASTM E96/E96M.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Non-Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Complying with UL 181, Class1.

2. Two-ply flameproof vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
3. Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
B. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Complying with UL 181, Class1.

2. Two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
3. Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire;
fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive, liquid adhesive plus tape, draw band, or adhesive plus
sheet metal screws.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346

SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification for cen-
trifugal HVAC fans, as listed in the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501,”Saudi Energy Conserva-
tion Code” SBC 601 and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Certification for Fan Sound Performance Rating: AMCA 311.
E. Certification for Fan Aerodynamic Performance Rating: AMCA 211.
F. Certification for Energy Efficiency: AMCA 211 for AMCA certification for Fan Energy Index
(FEI).
G. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
design.

Requirements.”
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
3. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets shall
include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be constructed in
accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
4. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416

B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum
two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the
minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359
adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with provisions
for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall have a
certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours. Bearings shall
have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron
unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude overheating due
to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Where necessary,
manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal con-
struction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite the supply fitting.
Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions
shall include extension tubes where necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral wrapped
or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and ABMA
9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by motors with a
power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard belt
section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40 horsepower
(30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-sheave type, with
a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave, high-
capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be aligned
by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross section to suit
sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the factory. Selection
by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each belt set shall be
bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
1.5 SQUARE IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Housing Material: Reinforced steel.
B. Housing Coating Hot-dip galvanized.
C. Drive: Direct or Belt driven.

D. Wheels: Aluminum airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
E. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled
F. Accessories: Backdraft damper.
1.6 TUBULAR IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Housing Material: Reinforced steel.
B. Housing Coating: Hot-dip galvanized.
C. Drive: Direct or Belt driven.
D. Wheels: Steel or Aluminum airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
E. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled
F. Accessories: Backdraft damper.
1.7 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN
A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully weatherproofed and constructed of
corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel support components to be zinc plated and suitable for
smoke exhaust. Fans to be UL listed for smoke removal, with operation temperature of 260 C for a
minimum of four hours continuous operation, or 400 °C for a minimum of two hours continuous
operation.
B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, designed to provide easy
access from roof level to all moving parts including motor, without dismantling unit.
C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-stall type, fully
balanced at factory.
D. Motor: Spark proof, type rated for operation at same temperature of exhaust fan assembly, provided
with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for 25000 hours of oper-
ation and in-built thermal overload protection; three-phase for motor sizes 0.37 kW (1/2 HP) and
larger.
E. Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 70 db measured on the A-scale of a
standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
1.8 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN
A. Fan: Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical discharge, fully weatherproofed, all durable rust-free
aluminum construction and corrosion-resistant protection. Fans shall be UL and cUL listed or in
compliance with relevant EN/BS standards listed in “Performance Requirements,” for grease re-
moval and high static pressures operation and listed for commercial cooking equipment exhaust
applications.
B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the A-scale of a stand-
ard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.

C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams permitting no air leakage.
Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof level to internal parts including motor, V-belt
drives and magnetic shutter.
D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading characteristics, spark proof
and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and shaft, with the whole rotating element precision
balanced at the factory.
E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning, permanently lubricated and
sealed pillow block ball bearing.
F. Motor: Spark proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated ball bearings and in-
built thermal overload protection. The motor is to be protected and isolated from the air-stream and
to be forced cooled by uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing through breath
tubes. Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for belt tension adjustment.
Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed. Motor is to be class F insulation.
G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are
listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Certification for Fan Sound Performance Rating: AMCA 311.
C. Certification for Fan Aerodynamic Performance Rating: AMCA 211.
D. Certification for Energy Efficiency: AMCA 211 for AMCA certification for Fan Energy Index
(FEI).
E. UL Compliance: UL 705 and UL 762.
F. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
G. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed for smoke removal, and shall be suitable for high
temperature application: 400oC for a minimum of two hours continuous operation.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment schedule(s) on
the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0 percent
pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation a
smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed to op-
erating and maintenance personnel.
F. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous operation.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423

1.4 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets shall
include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be constructed in
accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
3. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with mini-
mum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet
the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359
adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with provisions
for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall have
a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours. Bearings
shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be
cast iron unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude overheating due
to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Where neces-
sary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and
seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite the supply
fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication
provisions shall include extension tubes where necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral wrapped
or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by motors
with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard belt
section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40 horsepower
(30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-sheave type, with
a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave, high-
capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be aligned
by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross section to

suit sheave grooves.

2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the factory. Selection
by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each belt set shall be
bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
1.5 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS
A. Direct-drive or belt-driven propeller type, with galvanized-steel housing and orifice ring.
1. Fan Wheels: Cast aluminum.
B. Accessories:
1. Disconnect switch.
2. Gravity backdraft dampers.
3. Motorized dampers.
4. Motor-side back guard.
5. Wall sleeve.
6. Weathershield hood.
7. Weathershield front guard.

SECTION 233433.13 - COMMERCIAL AIR CURTAINS
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, installation, and identification for air
curtains, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC 601, and
“Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is
more stringent.
C. Quality Standard for Fan Performance: AMCA 220.
D. Quality Standard for Air Curtains in Foodservice Establishments: NSF 37.
E. Quality Standard for Coils: AHRI 410.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Materials and Workmanship: 24 months.
1.5 COMPONENTS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with epoxy-enamel, powder-coat finish.
1. Discharge Nozzles: Adjustable.
B. Air Intake: Grilles.
C. Fans: Direct drive, galvanized steel, centrifugal.
D. Motors: Single speed, totally enclosed, air over.
E. Filters: Washable panel type.
COMMERCIAL AIR CURTAINS 233433.13

F. Controls:
1. Built-in thermostat.
2. Automatic door switch.
3. Start-stop, push-button switch.
4. Three-speed fan switch.
5. Time-delay relay to allow air curtain to operate from 0.5 seconds to 10 hours.
6. Motor-control panel.
G. Accessories:
1. Mounting brackets.
2. Discharge extension neck for ceiling-recessed installation.
COMMERCIAL AIR CURTAINS 233433.13

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
(SBC) and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation for air
terminal units, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Building Code-” SBC 201, “Saudi
Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more
stringent
B. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate requirements of air terminals and are based on
specific systems selected. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics
may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements.”
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
D. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
E. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
F. The maximum noise level for any ceiling mounted item shall not exceed NC 35. Units shall meet
the airborne and radiated sound-power level (PWL) requirements scheduled, to attain the specified
NC levels. An 18-dB space attenuation shall be assumed in all octave bands or as recommended
by the manufacturer with consideration given to downstream duct construction and configuration
in determining airborne NC levels. Sound levels shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASA
S12.23.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating,

Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600

design.

Requirements.”
1.5 PRODUCTS
A. Modulating, Single-Duct Air Terminal Units:
1. Description: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing.

2. Casing: Galvanized steel.
a. Casing Lining: 13-mm- thick, neoprene or vinyl-coated fibrous glass insulation 24

kg/cu. m density complying with NFPA 90A requirements with UL 181
antimicrobial erosion-resistant coating with perforated metal liner.
3. Rating and Performance Certification: AHRI Industry Standards 880 I-P or 881 SI.
a. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.

b. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless
shown otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary
to comply with the noise criteria.
4. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and maximum damper leakage
of 2 percent of nominal flow at 500 Pa inlet static pressure.
5. Attenuator Section: Absorptive, 1000 mm long, with casing material matching unit casing.
6. Controls: DDC; Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with
temperature controls specified in other Sections.
B. Hangers and supports.
C. Seismic restraints.
A. AHRI 880 Certification: Test, rate, and label assembled air terminal units in accordance with
AHRI 880.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for air diffusers, as
listed in the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section;
C. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers and are based
on the specific requirements of the systems selected. Other manufacturers' products with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Require-
ments."
D. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Round ceiling diffusers, fully adjustable.
B. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers, fixed.
C. Linear bar diffusers with narrow core spacing arrangement.
D. Linear slot diffusers.
E. Swirl diffusers.
F. Jet nozzles.
AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13

SECTION 233713.23 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for air registers and
grilles, as listed in the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this
section; whichever is more stringent.
C. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of, registers, and grilles
and are based on the specific requirements of the systems selected. Other manufacturers' products
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
D. NFPA Compliance: Install, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Instal-
lation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Registers: Adjustable with adjustable opposed-blade damper.
B. Grilles: Fixed
C. Linear bar grilles with grid face arrangement.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23

SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
A. Products, materials, and equipment shall demonstrate compliance with requirements specified in
for commercial kitchen hoods, as listed in the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”, SBC 501,”Saudi Energy
Conservation Code” SBC 601, “Saudi Fire Code”, SBC 801, and the standards listed below in this
C. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for
joint and seam welding.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth
and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint 20,
high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food Service
Equipment Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or
fastening devices.
D. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food
Service Equipment Guidelines," Appendix A, "Seismic Restraint Details."
E. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation

Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines."
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
DOCUMENT CODE: 11-00013877-4800000930-DAH-DES-SPC-000001 REVISION: A 233813
Page 477 of 616
1.3 PRODUCTS
A. Hood Materials:
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
a. Minimum Thickness: 0.94 mm.

b. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright,
cold-rolled, unpolished finish).
c. Exposed Surfaces: As per Architectural requirements, in compliance with ASTM
A480/A480M
2. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be
NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed,
shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in
contact with food.
3. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound
for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum (3-mm) thickness that does not chip, flake,
or blister.
4. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or
PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods
and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
B. Type I Exhaust Hoods: [Standard] [Listed].
1. Quality Standard: NSF 2.

2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction; or they shall be designed, fabricated, and installed
according to NFPA 96.
3. Duct collar with fire damper shall comply with UL 710.
4. Makeup air fire damper shall comply with UL 555; frame Type A or B according to
SMACNA.
5. Hood Configuration: Exhaust and makeup air.
6. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy.
7. Filters/Baffles: Stainless steel or Aluminum tested according to UL 1046.
8. Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Removable according ti UL 710.
9. Luminaires: Recessed, LED complying with UL 1598.
10. Hood Controls: Integral with hood.
a. [Hood] [Wall]-mounting control cabinet for groups of hoods.

b. Exhaust fan on-off switches. Interlock exhaust fan with makeup air supply fan to
operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan with fire-suppression system to
operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in operation until
manually stopped
c. Photocell and Temperature Control: Vary speed of exhaust-air and makeup air fans
with variable-frequency controllers.
d. High-temperature control alarm.
e. Water-wash timer.
C. Type II Exhaust Hoods: SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible."
1. Quality Standard: NSF 2.

2. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal
and Flexible."
3. Hood Configuration: Exhaust and makeup air.
4. Hood Type: Heat and vapor removal.
5. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy.
6. Condensate hood baffles.
7. Luminaires: Recessed, LED complying with UL 1598.
Page 478 of 616
D. WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
1. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release
or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system
shall be listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing
Systems," by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Steel Pipe, (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A,
Schedule 40, plain ends.
b. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
c. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent,
and controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control
cabinet mounted on hood or wall. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting.
Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed
fittings shall be chrome plated.
d. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
e. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve; refer to Section "[Facility Natural-Gas
Piping] [Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping]."
f. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed
indicator for field installation.
g. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights,
and fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately
adjacent.
h. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare
terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control
cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to
start fan with fire alarm.
Page 479 of 616
SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
for high efficiency particulate filters, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Mechanical Code-”,
SBC 501, “Saudi Energy Conservation Code” SBC 601, and the standards listed below in this
C. Quality Standards: ASHRAE 62.1, ASHRAE 52.2, NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and UL 900.
D. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or nameplate indicating manufacturer's name, filter size,
rated efficiency, UL classification.
A. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
C. Comply with UL 900.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and
relevant IEC/EN standards, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
design.

Requirements.”
1.5 PRODUCTS
A. Metal Panel Filters:
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 234100

1. Description: Factory fabricated, flat panel type, cleanable air filters with holding frames.
Initial pressure drop at a face velocity of 2.5 meter per second shall be 55 Pa. Average
dust-spot efficiency shall be 18 percent and arrestance shall be 87 percent when filter is
operated to a final pressure drop of 250 Pa. Under these circumstances, dust-holding
capacity shall be 750 grams per square meter of face area.
2. Media: washable, constructed of non-woven synthetic-fabric-type, supported on rigid pleats
of suitable grid material. Filter element shall be sealed into an enclosing 16 GA galvanized
steel frame of rigid chipboard, providing a unit that will not rack.
3. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel 18 GA minimum.
B. Flat Panel Filters:
1. Media: Interlaced glass or Cotton and synthetic fibers, coated with antimicrobial agent and
nonflammable adhesive.
2. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer or Galvanized steel
with metal grid on outlet side and steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged, with pull and
retaining handles.
C. Extended-Surface, General
1. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or
non-supported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air-conditioning, heating and
ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface type fabricated for disposal
when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final) pressure drop.
2. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard 900.
3. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:
a. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.

b. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.
c. Grade C: 50-60 prefilter.
d. Grade D: 25-30 prefilter.
4. Filter Media:
a. Grade A, B and C Nonsupported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high-density glass

fibers or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat in woven or non-woven
backing material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to maintain pleat shape in a proper frame
to insure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
b. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of
high-density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening methods used to
maintain pleat shape, (metal backing or aluminum separators) shall be sealed in a
proper enclosing frame to ensure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays
are prohibited.
c. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural fibers. A
metal grid backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the media to maintain
uniform pleat shape and stability for proper airflow and maximum dust loading. The
media frame shall be constructed of high strength moisture resistant fiber or
beverage board. Bond the pleated media pack on all four edges to ensure no air
leakage for the life of the filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
5. Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Efficiency and arrestance of filters shall be determined in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2. Atmospheric dust spot efficiency and
synthetic dust weight arrestance shall not be less than the following:
a. Grade A
1) Percentage of Initial Efficiency: 75.4

2) Percentage of Average Efficiency: 86.4
3) Percentage of Average Arrestance: 99.0

b. Grade B

c. Grade C

d. Grade D
1) Percentage of Initial Efficiency: Less than 20.0

6. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter cartridge when
operated at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:
a. Grade A (Bag)
1) Initial Resistance: 130 (0.52)

2) Final resistance: 250 (1.00)
b. Grade A (Rigid Pleated)

c. Grade B (Bag)

d. Grade B (Rigid Pleated)

e. Grade C (Bag)

f. Grade C (Rigid Pleated)

g. Grade D (2-inch deep)

h. Grade D (4-inch deep)

7. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min (500 fpm)
face velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24
inches) (face area) filter shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the
dust holding capacity shall be proportionally higher or lower to the face area.
a. Grade A (Bag): 300 grams.

b. Grade A (Rigid Pleated): 90 grams.
c. Grade B (Bag): 430 grams.
d. Grade B (Rigid Pleated): 175 grams.
e. Grade C (Bag): 910 grams.
f. Grade C (Rigid Pleated): 250 grams.
g. Grade D (Bag): 150 grams.
h. Grade D (Rigid Pleated): 300 grams.
8. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter (square feet)
for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter at 150 m/min (500
fpm) face velocity shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the net
effective media area shall be proportionally higher or lower.
a. Grade A (Bag): 8.5 (91.0).

b. Grade A (Rigid Pleated): 5.3 (57.0).
c. Grade B (Bag): 8.5 (91.0).
d. Grade B (Rigid Pleated): 5.3 (57.0).
e. Grade C (Bag): 8.5 (91.0).
f. Grade C (Rigid Pleated): 5.3 (57.0).
g. Grade D (Bag): 1.4 (14.8).
h. Grade D (Rigid Pleated): 2.1 (23.0).
D. Extended-Surface Disposable Pleated Panel Filters:
1. Media: Interlaced glass or Cotton and synthetic fibers, coated with antimicrobial agent,
formed into deep V-shaped pleats held by self-supporting wire grid..
2. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer or Galvanized steel,
fire-retardent, 19 mm particleboard with gaskets.
E. Extended-Surface Nonsupported Bag Filters:
1. Media: Fibrous material formed into tapered pleats and coated with antimicrobial agent.
2. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel or Hard polyurethane foam.
3. Media Frames: Galvanized steel.
F. Front- and Back-Access Filter Frames: Aluminum framing with prefilters in a separate track,
removable from front or back.
G. Side-Access Housings: Galvanized steel with disposable prefilters and access doors, with interior
surface finish complying with ASHRAE 62.1.
H. Activated-Carbon Panel Filters:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated unit with activated-carbon media.

2. Media: Flat-panel, multilayer filter with inlet layer of polyester fibers, layer of activated-
carbon granules bonded to fibers, layer of polyurethane foam, and housed in cardboard
frame.
3. Media: Pleated, multilayer filter with inlet layer of cotton and synthetic fibers and layer of
activated-carbon granules bonded to synthetic fibers, formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and
held by self-wire grid, and housed in nonflammable cardboard frame.

4. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets and fasteners,
capable of holding media and media frame in place and suitable for bolting together into
built-up filter banks.
I. Filter Gauges: Diaphragm or Manometer type.

SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
for packaged compressor and condenser units, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Mechani-
cal Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is
listed and labeled.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code -
Section VIII - Pressure Vessels Division 1.
D. Comply with UL 1995, “Heating and Cooling Equipment.”
design.
A. Quality Standard: ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Compressor failure.
b. Condenser coil leak.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period (Components Other Than Compressor): Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200

1.6 PRODUCTS
A. General:
1. Air-cooled condenser shall be a packaged, self-contained assembly that includes fans,

motors, drives, refrigerant condensing coils, controls, inter-component piping and wiring,
totally enclosed weatherproof casing, and frame mounting; the unit shall be ready for
terminal field connections with fully automatic operation.
2. Condensing coils shall be designed and sized specifically for air-cooled condenser service.
Coil frame shall be not less than 12-gage (2.8 millimeter) galvanized steel. Coils shall be
factory tested pneumatically under water at not less than 400 pounds per square inch (2758
kilopascal). A purging vent shall be provided at the highest point of the entering refrigerant
header of each coil circuit. Condenser coil and receiver shall have an excess capacity of not
less than 20 percent for storage of pumped-down refrigerant. Condensing coil and
remainder of refrigerant circuit shall be cleaned and factory charged with dry nitrogen or
refrigerant.
3. Drive shall be weather-protected. Drive and fan discharge and inlet shall be guarded. Fan
guards shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and shall be suitable for salt-air
atmosphere; electrogalvanizing is not acceptable.
4. Condenser-mounted control panel and inter-component piping and wiring shall be
provided. Control panels exposed to the weather shall have NEMA 250, Type 3 enclosures
and NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures if protected by casing. Electrical work shall conform to
NFPA 70 requirements.
B. Air-Cooled Units, 3.5 to 17.6 kW:
1. Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed and isolated, variable speed.

2. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
3. Condenser Coil: Copper-tube, copper-fin coil; circuited for integral liquid subcooler, with
removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.
4. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated, totally
enclosed fan motor.
5. Accessories: Crankcase heater, cycle protector, low-voltage thermostat and subbase,
evaporator freeze thermostat, filter-dryer, high-pressure switch, liquid-line solenoid, low-
pressure switch, plastic mounting base, precharged and preinsulated suction and liquid
tubing, sound hood, thermostatic expansion valve, time-delay relay, reversing valve, and.
6. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel.
C. Air-Cooled Units, 21 to 422 kW:
1. Compressor: Hermetic scroll, with hot-gas bypass capacity control.

2. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic rotary-screw, with variable-frequency controller.
3. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
4. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, including subcooling circuit and
backseating liquid-line service access valve, grille.
5. Condenser Fan: Propeller type.
6. Controls: Factory mounted and wired.
7. Accessories: Low-voltage thermostat and subbase, low-ambient controller, gauge panel,
hot-gas bypass kit, part-winding-start, timing relay, circuit breakers, and contactors,
reversing valve, factory-mounted and wired non-fused disconnect switch, low-noise fans,
115 V ac convenience ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle in weatherproof enclosure,
resilient or spring vibration isolation, and security grilles.
8. Unit Casing: Galvanized or zinc-coated steel.
A. Compressor and Condenser Units: Certify capacity performance in accordance with ARI 210/240
for applications less than 19 kW and ARI 340/360 for applications greater than 19 kW.

B. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test sound-power-level ratings in accordance with AHRI 270
for applications less than 40 kW and AHRI 370 for applications greater than 40 kW.

SECTION 237313.16 - INDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Insulated, double-wall-casing, indoor, semi-custom, factory-assembled, air-handling units.
HVAC units, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC 601, and
“Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is
more stringent.
C. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabri-
cated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilat-
ing Systems."
D. UL/ETL Compliance: Electric coils, along with complete central-station air-handling unit, shall be
listed and labeled by ETL in compliance with UL requirements.
E. AHRI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of Central-Station
Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and
Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) or equivalent relevant BS/EN standards.
F. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance with applicable parts
of IEC 60034.
G. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of air han-
dler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace or repair unit to correct
the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and future reparability and
inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest and rele-
vant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
I. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
J. Quality Standards: AHRI 430, AHRI 1060, AMCA 301 or AHRI 260, NFPA 70, and NFPA 90A.
INDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.16

1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
design.

Requirements.”
C. Comply with ASHRAE 62.1 and ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and
application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling
units and components.
C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design vibration isolation, supports, and seismic restraints, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
F. Structural Performance:
1. Casing Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding positive/negative 133 percent

internal static pressure indicated, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of L/200 where
“L” is the unsupported span length within completed casings.
2. Floor and Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding 136-kg static load at
midspan, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 mm/mm.
3. Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding a static snow load of 146 kg/sq. m,
without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 mm/mm.
G. Casing Leakage Performance: ASHRAE 111, Class 6 leakage or better at plus or minus 2000 Pa.
H. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at design cubic meters
per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated above.
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a smaller
motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation shall not
qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or reward.
I. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the peak of static
efficiency.
J. Operating Limits: AMCA 99 or equivalent relevant BS/EN standards.

K. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and SBC 201. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC."
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
L. Wind Performance: Air-handling units are to withstand the effects of wind determined in accordance
with ASCE/SEI 7. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing shall be hot dipped
conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc per square meter
(0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may be provided subject to
the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is equal or greater than the
galvanized steel specified.
B. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted panels
and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more permanent
gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.
C. Unit Casing:
1. Base Rail: Galvanized steel

2. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel
3. Outside Casing Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel solid; antimicrobial coating.
5. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, antimicrobial coating.
6. Cabinet Insulation: Glass-fiber blanket or board insulation, Type I or Type II ASTM C1071
or injected CFC free polyurethane foam insulation complying with NFPA 90A flame spread
and smoke generation requirements, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems,” for insulation; 50 mm thick.
7. Casing Panel R-Value: Thermal Conductance: Maximum 0.68 W/sq.mK.
8. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections Upstream of Fans: 750 Pa (3-inch wg),
1000 Pa (4-inch wg), or 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) as applicable as per equipment schedule and
drawings.
9. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections Downstream and Including Fans: 750 Pa
(3-inch wg), 1000 Pa (4-inch wg), or 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) as applicable as per equipment
schedule and drawings.
10. Inspection access panels and access doors.
11. Condensate Drain Pans Double-wall, stainless steel, formed sections.
D. Supply Fan Section:
1. Type: backward-inclined centrifugal

2. Drive: V-belt.
3. Internal vibration control.
4. Motors.
5. Variable-frequency motor controller serving each fan individually
E. Coils:
1. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized-steel casings.

2. Refrigerant Coils: Designed for use with R-407C or R-410 refrigerant.

a. Tubes: Copper.
b. Fins: Aluminum.
c. Headers: Copper.
d. Frames: Galvanized steel.
3. Electric Heating Coils: Open-coil resistance wire.
a. Control Panel: Unit mounted.
F. Prefilters:
1. UL 900.
2. Panel.
G. Final Filters:
1. UL 900.
2. Bag.
3. Minimum MERV 13 efficiency according to ASHRAE 52.2.
H. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2
Filter Access: Side.
Filter gauges.
I. Dampers:
1. Leakage Rate: Not to exceed 20 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa and 40 L/s per sq. m at 1.0 MPa;
AMCA 500.
2. Damper Operators: Electronic.
3. Zone Dampers: Two; single blade; galvanized steel.
4. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed blade; galvanized steel.
5. Low-Leakage, Outdoor-Air Dampers: Double skin; airfoil blade; galvanized steel, AMCA
511.
6. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Parallel blade; galvanized steel
7. Combination filter and mixing box.
J. UV-C Lamp System: Factory installed and preengineered.
1. For coils disinfection: A minimum of 6 W/sq. ft. (64.6 W/sq. m) of coil surface area to
achieve a minimum of 100 microwatts/sq. cm equally distributed on the target surface as
recommended by ASHRAE.
2. For air disinfection: Array of UV-C lamps to be provided to deliver a minimum dose of 1500
microjoules/sq. cm total to air flowing through.
1.7 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or
moisture.
C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.
D. Aluminum: ASTM B209M.
A. General:
1. AHRI or Eurovent certified AHUs: AHUs selected by the Engineer for testing shall be fac-
tory assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested units.
2. Non-AHRI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with speci-
fied Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities, ensure correct
fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. AHRI 430 Certification: Test, rate, and label air-handling units and their components in accordance
with AHRI 430.
C. AHRI 1060 Certification: Test, rate, and label air-handling units that include air-to-air energy
recovery devices in accordance with AHRI 1060.
D. AHRI 260 or AMCA 311 Sound Performance Rating Certification: Test, rate, and label in
accordance with AHRI 260 or AMCA 311.
E. Fan Energy Index (FEI): Test in accordance with AMCA 210 and rate in accordance with
AMCA 99, AMCA 207, and AMCA 208.
F. Fan Operating Limits: Classify fans in accordance with AMCA 99, Section 14.
G. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum 450-psig (3105-kPa) internal pressure and to
minimum 300-psig (2070-kPa) internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and
ASHRAE 33.
H. Approval:
1. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s and Employer’s representative. The team
will comprise at least three persons from the Client’s side. All expenses to be borne by the
Contractor . The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum two-week notice
prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and re-testing
of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
1.9 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases with vibration isolation devices
as shown on drawings
B. Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel
rods and spring hangers.

SECTION 237343.16 - OUTDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Insulated, double-wall-casing, outdoor, semi-custom, factory-assembled, air-handling units.
for air-handling units, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC
601, and “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section;
C. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabricat-
ed, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems."
D. UL/ETL Compliance: Electric coils, along with complete central-station air-handling unit, shall
be listed and labeled by ETL in compliance with UL requirements.
E. AHRI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory test-
ed according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of Central-
Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heat-
ing and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) or alternative relevant BS/EN standards.
F. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance with applicable parts
of IEC 60034.
G. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of air han-
dler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace or repair unit to cor-
rect the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and future reparability
and inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest and rele-
vant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
I. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
J. Quality Standards: AHRI 430, AHRI 1060, AMCA 301 or AHRI 260, NFPA 70, and NFPA 90A.
OUTDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237343.16

design.

Requirements.”
C. Comply with ASHRAE 62.1 and ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and
application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-
handling units and components.
C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation, supports, and seismic restraints, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
F. Structural Performance:
1. Casing Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding positive/negative 133 percent

internal static pressure indicated, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of L/200 where
“L” is the unsupported span length within completed casings.
2. Floor and Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding 136-kg static load at
midspan, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 mm/mm.
3. Roof Panels: Self-supporting and capable of withstanding a static snow load of 146
kg/sq. m, without exceeding a midpoint deflection of 0.0042 mm/mm.
G. Casing Leakage Performance: ASHRAE 111, Class 6 leakage or better at plus or minus 2000 Pa.
H. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at design cubic me-
ters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated above.
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a
smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation
shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or reward.
I. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the peak of stat-
ic efficiency.
J. Operating Limits: AMCA 99 or equivalent relevant BS/EN standards.

K. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and SBC 201. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC."
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
L. Wind Performance: Air-handling units are to withstand the effects of wind determined in
accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing shall be hot
dipped conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc per square
meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may be provided
subject to the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is equal or greater
than the galvanized steel specified.
B. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted panels
and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more permanent
gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.
C. Unit Casing:
1. Base Rail: Galvanized steel.

2. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel.
3. Outside Casing Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel; solid; antimicrobial coating.
5. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel; antimicrobial coating.
6. Cabinet Insulation: Glass-fiber blanket or board insulation, Type I or Type II
ASTM C1071 or injected CFC free polyurethane foam insulation complying with NFPA
90A flame spread and smoke generation requirements, “Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems,” for insulation; 50 mm thick.
7. Casing Panel Thermal Conductance: Maximum 0.68 W/sq.mK.
8. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections Upstream of Fans: 750 Pa 1000 Pa or
1500 Pa as applicable as per equipment schedule and drawings.
9. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections Downstream and Including Fans: 750 Pa
1000 Pa or 1500 Pa as applicable as per equipment schedule and drawings.
10. Inspection access panels and access doors.
11. Condensate Drain Pans: Double-wall, stainless steel; formed sections.
D. Fan Section:
1. Type: DWDI, backward-inclined centrifugal or DWDI, airfoil centrifugal.

2. Drive: V-belt or Direct.
3. Internal vibration control.
4. Motors.
5. Variable-frequency motor controller.
E. Coils:
1. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized-steel casings.
2. Electric Heating Coils: Open-coil resistance wire.
a. Control Panel: Unit mounted.

3. Cooling Coil: Refrigerant.
4. Refrigerant Coils: Designed for use with R-407C or R-410 refrigerant.
a. Tubes: Copper.
b. Fins: Aluminum.
c. Headers: Copper.
d. Frames: Galvanized steel.
F. Prefilters:
1. UL 900.
2. Panel.
G. Final Filters:
1. UL 900.
2. Bag.
3. Minimum MERV 13 efficiency according to ASHRAE 52.2.
H. Filter Access: Side.
I. Filter gauges.
J. Dampers:
1. Leakage Rate: Not to exceed 20 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa and 40 L/s per sq. m at 1.0 MPa;
AMCA 500.
2. Damper Operators: Electronic.
3. Zone Dampers: Two; single blade; galvanized steel.
4. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed blade; galvanized steel.
5. Low-Leakage, Outdoor-Air Dampers: Double skin; airfoil blade; galvanized steel; AMCA
511.
6. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Parallel blade; galvanized steel.
7. Combination filter and mixing box.
K. Sound Attenuators:
1. Factory fabricated.
2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory
materials with flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not
exceeding 50; ASTM E84.
3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
4. Configuration: Straight or Elbow.
5. Shape: Rectangular.
6. Attenuation Mechanism: Acoustic glass fiber, inert and vermin proof; or, Packless.
L. Air-to-Air Energy Recovery: Heat wheel.
M. UV-C Lamp System: Factory installed and preengineered.
1. For coils disinfection: A minimum of (64.6 W/sq. m) of coil surface area to achieve a min-
imum of 100 microwatts/sq. cm equally distributed on the target surface as recommended
by ASHRAE.
2. For air disinfection: Array of UV-C lamps to be provided to deliver a minimum dose of
1500 microjoules/sq. cm total to air flowing through.

1.7 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or
moisture.
C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.
D. Aluminum: ASTM B209M.
A. General:
1. AHRI or Eurovent certified AHUs: AHUs selected by the Engineer for testing shall be fac-
tory assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested
units.
2. Non-AHRI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with speci-
fied Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities, ensure correct
fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. AHRI 430 Certification: Test, rate, and label air-handling units and their components in
accordance with AHRI 430.
C. AHRI 1060 Certification: Test, rate, and label air-handling units that include air-to-air energy
recovery devices in accordance with AHRI 1060.
D. AHRI 260 or AMCA 311 Sound Performance Rating Certification: Test, rate, and label in
accordance with AHRI 260 or AMCA 311.
E. Fan Energy Index (FEI): Test in accordance with AMCA 210 and rate in accordance with
AMCA 99, AMCA 207, and AMCA 208.
F. Fan Operating Limits: Classify fans in accordance with AMCA 99, Section 14.
G. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum (3105-kPa) internal pressure and to minimum
(2070-kPa) internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
H. Approval:
1. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s and Employer’s representative. The team
will comprise at least three persons from the Client’s side. All expenses to be borne by the
Contractor . The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum two-week notice
prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and re-
testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.

1.9 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained spring isolators.

SECTION 238123.11 – SMALL CAPACITY (6 TONS (21 KW) AND SMALLER), COMPUTER-ROOM
AIR-CONDITIONERS, FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
for HVAC units, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC 601,
and “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever
is more stringent.
C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safe-
ty Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air

Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
G. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shells to comply with 2010
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Materials and Workmanship for Compressors: Five years.
B. Materials and Workmanship for Humidifiers: Three years.
C. Materials and Workmanship for Control Boards: Three years.
SMALL CAPACITY (6 TONS (21 KW) AND SMALLER), COMPUTER-ROOM

AIR-CONDITIONERS, FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS 238123.11
A. Seismic Performance: Computer-room air conditioners shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
A. Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped.
B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded tubular-steel frame with removable steel panels, insulated, and with
baked-enamel finish with floor stand for downflow units.
C. Supply-Air Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven.
D. Compressor: scroll, variable capacity.
E. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
F. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins with stainless-steel drain pan.
G. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral, copper-tube aluminum-fin coil with propeller
or centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements.
I. Pre-Filter: 50 mm thick, MERV 8.
J. Filter: 50 mm thick, MERV 13.
K. Humidifier: Infrared.
L. Disconnect Switch: Locking.
M. Control System: Microprocessor unit or remote-mounted panel with solid-state temperature- and
humidity-control modules.
SMALL CAPACITY (6 TONS (21 KW) AND SMALLER), COMPUTER-ROOM

SECTION 238123.12 – LARGE CAPACITY (7 TONS (25 KW) AND LARGER), COMPUTER-ROOM
AIR-CONDITIONERS, FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
for HVAC units, as listed in, but not limited to the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC 601,
and “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever
is more stringent.
C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safe-
ty Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air

Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
G. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shells to comply with 2010
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Materials and Workmanship for Compressors: Five years.
B. Materials and Workmanship for Humidifiers: Three years.
C. Materials and Workmanship for Control Boards: Three years.
LARGE CAPACITY (7 TONS (25 KW) AND LARGER), COMPUTER-ROOM

A. Seismic Performance: Computer-room air conditioners shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to SBC 201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
A. Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped.
B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel, insulated, and baked-enamel finish with floor stand for
downflow units.
C. Supply-Air Fan: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven.
D. Compressors: Semihermetic or Scroll, variable capacity.
E. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
F. Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face-circuit, direct-expansion coil of seamless copper

tubes expanded into aluminum fins with stainless-steel drain pan having an automatic condensate
pump if required.
G. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Copper-tube, aluminum-fin coils with internal

overload protection and integral electric control panel and disconnect switch. Control capacity by
modulating fan speeds or three-way refrigerant bypass with receiver and isolation valve.
H. Reheat: Copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil with three-way solenoid valve and refrigerant check valve
for hot gas reheat.
I. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed finned-tube electric elements for minimum of three
stages.
J. Pre-Filter: Pleated cotton fabric 50 mm thick and MERV 8.
K. Filter: Pleated cotton fabric 50 mm thick and MERV 13.
L. Humidifier: Electrode or Ultrasonic steam.
M. Integral electrical controls with disconnect switch.
N. Control System: Microprocessor unit remote-mounted panel with solid-state temperature- and
humidity-control modules.
LARGE CAPACITY (7 TONS (25 KW) AND LARGER), COMPUTER-ROOM

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation for split air-
conditioners, as listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Mechanical Code” SBC 501, and the
standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package,
"Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Section 4 -
"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
D. Efficiency of selected unit shall meet and exceed requirements of ASHRAE 90.1
design.

Requirements.”
1.4 COMPONENTS
A. Split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and com-
pressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be
connected to ducts.
B. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Galvanized-steel chassis and drain pan.

2. Insulated.
3. Copper-tube refrigerant coil.
4. Forward-curved galvanized fan.
5. Multispeed motor.
6. Permanent filters.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126

C. Wall- or Ceiling-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Enameled-steel cabinet.
3. Centrifugal fan.
4. Multispeed motor.
5. Disposable filters.
D. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Enameled-steel casing.
2. Hermetically sealed scroll compressor.
4. Heat-pump components.
5. Aluminum-propeller fan.
E. Accessories: Low-voltage thermostat.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126

SECTION 238129 - VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS
A. Comply with the applicable requirements and recommendations of local Saudi Building Code (SBC)
and the latest applicable local regulations for materials, tests, and installation, for VRV systems, as
listed in, but not limited to, the “Saudi Energy Conservation Code-”, SBC 601, “Saudi Mechanical
Code” SBC 501, and the standards listed below in this section; whichever is more stringent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of units and are
based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance char-
acteristics may be considered.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 , Arti-
cle 100.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND
34 PACKAGE , “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Qual-
ity," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction
and System Start-up."
F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
G. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable of
working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to
the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound
level shall not exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa at high speed.
H. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test pro-
cedures specified in AHRI standards. Sound-power values apply to units provided with factory-
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models
will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation between
models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each
unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.
I. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of VRF HVAC systems and products.

2. Shipped VRF HVAC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous
period of five years within time of bid.
3. VRF HVAC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least
five completed projects.
4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, and operation and maintenance
manuals for all products intended for use.
5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:
VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS 238129

a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.
c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.
d. Technical support for system installation training, startup, commissioning, and
troubleshooting of installations.
e. Owner training.
J. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications:
1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
2. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within five
consecutive years before time of bid.
3. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value.
a. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.
4. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to
execute work according to schedule.
5. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.
6. Product parts inventory to support ongoing system operation for a period of not less than five
years after Substantial Completion.
7. VRF HVAC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to
comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by
manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.
K. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
1. Each employee shall be certified by manufacturer for proper installation of systems,

including, but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and
furnished for installation.
2. Installer certification shall be valid and current for duration of Project.
3. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request.
4. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.
a. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within five
consecutive years before time of bid.
b. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and
value.
L. ISO Compliance: System equipment and components furnished by VRF HVAC system
manufacturer shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility.
design.
1.4 SUMMARY
A. Section includes complete VRF HVAC system(s) including, but not limited to, delegated design and
the following components to make a complete operating system(s) according to requirements
indicated:
1. Indoor, ceiling-mounted units for ducting.

2. Indoor, exposed, wall-mounted units.
3. System controls.

4. System refrigerant and oil.

5. System condensate drain piping.
6. System refrigerant piping.
7. Metal hangers and supports.
8. Metal framing systems.
9. Fastener systems.
10. Pipe stands.
11. Equipment stands.
12. Miscellaneous support materials.
13. Piping and tubing insulation.
14. System control cable and raceways.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Direct-expansion (DX) VRF HVAC system(s) with variable capacity in response to varying cooling
and heating loads. System shall consist of multiple indoor units, outdoor unit(s), piping, controls,
and electrical power to make complete operating system(s) complying with requirements indicated.
1. Two-pipe system design.

2. System(s) operation, air-conditioning as indicated on Drawings.
3. Each system with one refrigerant circuit shared by all indoor units connected to system.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
C. AHRI Compliance: System and equipment performance certified according to AHRI 1230 and
products listed in AHRI directory.
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. ASHRAE 15: For safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 62.1: For indoor air quality.
3. ASHRAE 135: For control network protocol with remote communication.
4. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: For system and component energy efficiency.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design complete and operational VRF HVAC system(s) complying with
1. Provide system refrigerant calculations.
a. Refrigerant concentration limits shall be within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and

governing codes.
b. Indicate compliance with manufacturer's maximum vertical and horizontal travel
distances. Prepare a comparison table for each system showing calculated distances
compared to manufacturer's maximum allowed distances.
2. Include a mechanical ventilation system and gas detection system as required to comply with
ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
3. System Refrigerant Piping and Tubing:

a. Arrangement: Arrange piping to interconnect indoor units, HRCUs, and outdoor

unit(s) in compliance with manufacturer requirements and requirements indicated.
b. Routing: Conceal piping above ceilings and behind walls to maximum extent
possible.
c. Sizing: Size piping system, using a software program acceptable to manufacturer, to
provide performance requirements indicated. Consider requirements to accommodate
future change requirements.
4. System Controls:
a. Network arrangement.
b. Network interface with other building systems.
c. Product selection.
d. Sizing.
B. Service Access:
1. Provide and document service access requirements.

2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components that require service
and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid locations that are difficult to access if
possible.
3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above inaccessible ceilings,
provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to gain access. Properly size the
openings to allow for service, removal, and replacement.
4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within an 18-inch
(450-mm) reach of the finished assembly.
5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an installation that
provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's written instructions for use.
6. Comply with OSHA regulations.
C. System Design and Installation Requirements:
1. Design and install systems indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and

written instructions.
2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated, contact Architect for
direction. The most stringent requirements should apply unless otherwise directed in writing
by Architect.
D. System Adaptability to Future Changes: Arrange and size system refrigerant piping to accommodate
future changes to system without having to resize and replace existing refrigerant piping.
E. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each HRCU, indoor unit and outdoor unit
for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system operation.
F. System Capacity Ratio: The sum of connected capacity of all indoor units shall be within the
following range of outdoor-unit rated capacity:
1. Not less than 60 percent.

2. Not more than 130 percent.
3. Range acceptable to manufacturer.
G. System Turndown: Stable operation down to 20 percent of outdoor-unit capacity.
H. System Auto Refrigerant Charge: Each system shall have an automatic refrigerant charge function
to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed in system.
I. Outdoor Conditions:
1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered.

a. Design equipment and supports to withstand wind loads of governing code and
ASCE/SEI 7.
b. Provide corrosion-resistant coating for components and supports where located in
coastal or industrial climates that are known to be harmful to materials and finishes.
2. Maximum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: 55 deg. C.

3. Minimum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: 0 deg. C.
J. Seismic Performance: VRF HVAC system(s) shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
K. Sound Performance: Sound levels generated by operating HVAC equipment shall be within
1. Indoor: See Drawings. Within design guidelines of "2015 ASHRAE HANDBOOK- HVAC
Applications."
2. Outdoor: See Drawings Within ordinance of governing authorities.
L. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient, surface, and system
temperature changes.
M. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
1.7 INDOOR, CONCEALED, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS FOR DUCTING
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and
controls required for mating to ductwork, piping, power, and controls field connections.
1.8 INDOOR, EXPOSED, WALL-MOUNTED UNITS
controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections, MERV 7 efficiency
filter as per ASHRAE 52.2.
1.9 INDOOR, SUSPENDED, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections, MERV 7 efficiency
filter as per ASHRAE 52.2.
1.10 SYSTEM CONTROLS
A. General Requirements:
1. Network: Indoor units, HRCUs, and outdoor units shall include integral controls and connect
through a TIA-485A or manufacturer-selected control network.
2. Network Communication Protocol: open control communication between interconnected
units.
3. Integration with Building Automation System: ASHRAE 135, BACnet IP and certified by
BACnet Testing Lab (BTL), including the following:
a. Ethernet connection via RJ-45 connectors and port with transmission at 100 Mbps or
higher.

b. Integration devices shall be connected to local uninterruptible power supply unit(s)

to provide at least 5 minutes of battery backup operation after a power loss.
c. Integration shall include control monitoring scheduling change of value notifications
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.


Mechanical Specs.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Specs.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Specs.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trojena Operational Assets at Logistic Laydown Area

099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

101423 PANEL SIGNAGE

111313 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

133423.16 FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

230923.16 GAS INSTRUMENTS

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

B. Employer-Furnished Material: Hand-carried and Wheeled fire extinguishers.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and Workmanship: Five years.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type SS304 / SS316.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416

A. Portable Hand-Carried Fire Extinguishers:

1. Multipurpose dry-chemical type; UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 4.5 kg.

B. Mounting brackets: Manufacturer’s standard plated or baked-enamel steel.

END OF SECTION 104416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS

A. Knocked-Down Corridor Lockers:

1. Doors: 1.52-mm steel-sheet panels, vented.

1. Tops: Laminated hardwood.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Pre-assembled.

END OF SECTION 105113

METAL LOCKERS 105113

SECTION 111313 - LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

1. Molded-Rubber Bumpers: Rectangular, (152) (mm) thick.

END OF SECTION 111313

LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313

SECTION 111316 - LOADING DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS

A. Inflatable Dock Seals: Neoprene-coated nylon cover fabric.

B. Inflatable Dock Shelters: Rigid canopy and sides.

C. Transparent-Strip Door Curtains:

1. Strip Material: Extruded PVC, low-temperature grade.

END OF SECTION 111316

LOADING DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS 111316

SECTION 114000 – FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Electric and Fuel-Burning Equipment: UL listed.

D. Seismic Restraints: Complies with SMACNA's details.

A. Refrigeration Compressors: [Five] 5 years.

END OF SECTION 114000

FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000

SECTION 118123 – FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE